iECDISUserManual

MartekMarineLtdiECDIS

iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Nopartofthispublicationmaybereproduced,transmitted,transcribed,storedinaretrievalsystem,ortranslated
into any language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
withoutpriorwrittenpermissionfromMartekMarineLtd.

Allcopyright,confidentialinformation,patents,designrightsandallotherintellectualpropertyrightsofwhatsoever
naturecontainedhereinareandshallremainthesoleandexclusivepropertyofMartekMarineLtd.Theinformation
furnishedhereinisbelievedtobeaccurateandreliable.

However,noresponsibilityisassumedbyMartekMarineLtdforitsuse,orforanyinfringementsofpatentsorother
rightsofthirdpartiesresultingfromitsuse.

The Martek Marine Ltd name and Martek Marine Ltd logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Martek
MarineLimited.

Allothertrademarksarethepropertyoftheirrespectiveowners.

MartekMarineLtd
AdwickPark
Manvers
Rotherham
SouthYorkshire
S635AB
UnitedKingdom

Telephone:+44(0)1709599222
Fax:+44(0)1709871873
Email:[email protected]
Web:www.martekmarine.com

1
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
iECDISUserManual

CustomerFeedbackForm

DearValuedCustomer,

MartekMarineLtdiscommittedtocontinuouslyimprovingtheproductsandservicesthatweprovideyouwith.We
encourageandwelcomeyourcommentsandfeedback.

Ifanyaspectsofourproductand/orservicehavenotmetorexceededyourexpectations,couldyoupleasetellus
below?Pleasefeelfreetomakeanysuggestionsforimprovementsortellushowwecouldhavedonebetter.Ifwe
haveperformedwellinanyareas,pleasealsotellus!

Alternatively,pleaseemailanycommentsto:

[email protected]

2
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 TableofContents

QualityPolicy

Warranty

1. Introduction
1.1 UserManualStructure
1.2 TypographicConventions
1.3 NormativeReferences

2. ECDISInterface
2.1 StartingandTerminatingtheECDIS
2.2 MainWindow
2.3 IndicatorsPanel
2.4 ChartScaleandQuickAccessButtonsPanel
2.5 FunctionalButtonsMenu
2.6 FunctionalPanels
2.7 HotkeysList

3. ECDISSetUp
3.1 Input/output
3.1.1 Adding,editinganddeletinginput/outputdevices
3.1.2 Monitoringserialline
3.2 OwnShipData
3.3 SystemSetup
3.3.1 MeasurementUnitsandTime
3.3.2 SystemCheckUp
3.3.3 DiagnosticsInfo
3.3.4 DiskSpaceControl
3.3.5 SystemInformation
3.3.6 ColourDifferentationTest
3.3.7 BrightnessControlofScreen
3.4 UpdatingECDISSoftware
3.5 DataSynchronization
3.5.1 SynchronizationOperation
3.5.2 SynchronizationSetup
3.5.3 SynchronizationMonitor

4. InstallingData
4.1 InstallingandDisplayingDatabases
4.1.1 InstallingDatabases
4.1.2 DisplayingDatabases
4.2 LicensingData
4.2.1 InstallingLicensesManually
4.2.2 InstallingLicensesfromFile
4.2.3 GettingLicensesExpiringBeforeaSpecifiedDate

3
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 4.2.4 ViewingLicensesList
4.2.5 DynamicLicensing
4.3 InstallingNewVersionoftheDatabase
4.4 LicensingSoftwareModules
4.5 ENCDatainS57Format
4.5.1 S63ProtectionofENCData
4.5.2 LargeMediaSupport
4.5.3 ImportS57toCM93v3

5. ChartsDisplay
5.1 MovingAroundtheChartView
5.2 ScalingtheChartView
5.3 Bookmarks
5.4 ChartObjectsInformationandChartLegend
5.5 AdditionalChartWindows
5.5.1 LookAheadWindow
5.5.2 3DWindow
5.6 SettingUpChartDisplay
5.6.1 ChartPresentationModels
5.6.2 DisplayType
5.6.3 SupplementaryData
5.6.4 DepthAreasPresentation
5.6.5 DepthSettings
5.6.6 TextSettings
5.6.7 OtherSettings
5.7 PrintingChart

6. VoyagePreparation
6.1 ChartsCatalogue
6.1.1 SearchingChartsCatalogue
6.1.2 ViewingChartBoundariesbyScaleLevels
6.2 CorrectingtheChart
6.2.1 AutomaticUpdating
6.2.2 SemiautomaticUpdating
6.2.3 UpdatingLog/ReviewUpdates
6.2.4 ManualUpdating
6.3 MarinerObjects
6.3.1 CreatingandEditingMarinerObjects
6.3.2 Export/ImportofMarineObjects
6.4 RoutePlanningandPlotting
6.4.1 AutomaticRoutePlanning
6.4.2 ManualRoutePlanning
6.4.3 RouteEditMode
6.4.4 RoutePlan
6.4.5 AddingCriticalPoints
6.4.6 EditingRouteSchedule
6.4.7 RoutesExporttoandRoutesImportfromaFile
6.4.8 RoutesExporttoandRoutesImportfromaDevice
6.5 TidesandTidalStreamsData
6.5.1 TidesInformation
6.5.2 TidalStreamsInformation

4
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 6.5.3 AstronomicalInformation
6.6 WeatherForecast:Download
6.6.1 WeatherSubscription
6.6.2 EasyModeSetupandDownload
6.6.3 OverviewandCoastalDownload
6.6.4 CustomDownload
6.6.5 SchedulesDownload
6.6.6 WeatherPackagesHandling
6.6.7 WeatherDownloadSetup
6.7 WeatherForecast:Display
6.7.1 TurningonandConfiguringtheDisplayofWeatherData
6.7.2 DisplayofCyclones
6.7.3 DisplayofIceSituation
6.7.4 WeatherTimeSeries
6.7.5 WeatherAlarmArea
6.7.6 ComparisonofRoutes
6.7.7 InspectShipPosition
6.8 PiracyInformation

7. Navigation
7.1 OwnShipPositionandPassedTrack
7.2 PositionSources
7.2.1 PrimaryandSecondaryPositionSources
7.2.2 DeadReckoning
7.2.3 ManualPositionFixbyRangeandBearingLOPs
7.2.4 PositionCorrection
7.2.5 PositionDiscrepancies
7.3 HeadingSources
7.4 NavigationalDataDisplayandSources
7.4.1 NavigationalPanel
7.4.2 NavigationalDataSources
7.4.3 WindSensorData
7.5 NavigationalChartSettings
7.5.1 NavigationMode
7.5.2 BestScaleMode
7.5.3 ChartDisplayPalettes
7.5.4 ChartOrientation
7.5.5 TrueandRelativeMotion
7.5.6 LightSectors
7.6 Alarms
7.6.1 AlarmsandWarningPanel
7.6.2 AntigroundingAlarm
7.6.3 SpecialAlarms
7.6.4 AlarmConditionsList
7.7 RouteMonitoring
7.7.1 RouteMonitoringMode
7.7.2 RouteMonitoringPanel
7.7.3 GotoWaypointFunction

8. NavigationalInformationTools
8.1 EchoSounder

5
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 8.2 AIS
8.2.1 AISTargetsData
8.2.2 AISTargetsDisplay
8.3 ARPA
8.3.1 ARPATargetsData
8.3.2 ARPATargetsDisplay
8.4 RadarImageOverlay
8.5 AnticollisionDisplay
8.5.1 GraphicElementsoftheAnticollisionDisplay
8.5.2 ConfigurationoftheAnticollisionDisplay
8.5.3 IndicationofApproachofTargetstoSpecifiedTimeandDistanceLimits
8.5.4 IndicationofCollisionRisk
8.5.5 ExampleandRecommendationsfortheAnticollisionDisplayUse

9. OtherNavigationalTools
9.1 RangeandBearingfromOwnShiptoOtherObjects
9.1.1 ERBL
9.1.2 CheckPoints
9.1.3 RangeandBearingtotheMousePointer
9.2 ManOverboardandPositionFix
9.2.1 ManOverboardFunctionality
9.2.2 PositionFixFunctionality
9.3 LogBook
9.3.1 ViewingLogBookEntries
9.3.2 LogBookPlayBack
9.4 Navicalculator

10. ChangeControlDocument
AppendixA:Openandcloseofinternetconnection.(UpdateofECDISchartsandservices)
AppendixB:Troubleshooting
AppendixC:ListofInputSentences
AppendixD:ListofOutputSentences
AppendixE:AlgorithmandExamplesofManualPositionFixbyRangeandBearingLOPs
AppendixF:TheoreticalPrinciplesoftheAnticollisionDisplay
AppendixG:Preparingforchartupdate
AppendixH:DisplayReadingDistance
AppendixI:RMRSRulesforEquipmentUtilization
AppendixJ:EnergySaving
AppendixK:Declaration
AppendixL:RussianMarkofConformity
AppendixM:LanguageSelection
Glossary
Abbreviations

6
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
QualityPolicy

Martek Marine Ltd is committed to providing our customers with goods and services of consistent quality and
reliability,ontime,whichisbothfitandsafefortheirintendeduse.

We are committed to keeping abreast of new technologies, to anticipate the changing requirements of our
customers,andtomeetthechanginglegislativerequirementsforourproducts.Thisensuresthatwemaintainour
capabilityofmeetingthehigheststandards,andtoimprove,wherepossible,thequalityofourservice.

The company is committed to maintaining a Quality Management System and to using suppliers whose quality
systemshavebeenaccreditedtoBSENISO9001:2008.

OurqualityManagementSystemisfullydocumented,comprehensiveandreadilyunderstood.Thewholecompany
implementsitanditismandatorythatallcompanypersonnelcomplywithitsrequirements.

The company engenders a working environment amongst all its employees such that they shall have a full
commitmenttoqualityandonlyproduceworkofthehigheststandard.

7
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Warranty

MartekMarineLtdwarrantsproductsasawholeandindividuallyagainstfailureinthefieldfor12monthsfromdate
ofshipmentfromMartekMarineLtd.

Thewarrantyperiodcoversagainstdefectsduetocomponentfailureorworkmanshipwhencommissionedand/or
servicedbyMartekMarineLtdcertifiedengineers.

Thefollowingconditionsmayinvalidateyourwarranty:

1. Ifmaintenanceofthesystemhasnotbeencarriedoutinlinewithrequirementsasspecifiedinthismanual.
2. Ifthesystemhasbeenoperatedormaintainedbyuntrainedcrewmembers.
3. IfthesystemfailsasaresultofworkcarriedoutbyanoncertifiedMartekMarineLtdengineer.
4. Ifnontypeapprovedparts1areusedwithinthesystem.
5. IfthesystemHardwareisreconfiguredorupgradedwithoutpriorauthorisationbyMartekMarineLtd.
6. If the system Software is modified or affected either directly or indirectly in anyway without prior
authorisationbyMartekMarineLtd.

1InlinewiththeMarineEquipmentDirective.

Martekmustbenotifiedofanywarrantyclaimsimmediatelyondiscoveryandourpolicyisforareturnofequipment
back to UK for impartial inspection. Returns must be accompanied by a returns number which must be obtained
[email protected]

Where the client prefers, Martek Marine Ltd can dispatch a Martek Marine Ltd service engineer to the vessel
locationonreceiptofapurchaseorder.Ifthewarrantyisupheldonlycostsassociatedwithtravelandsubsistence
willbecharged.

If the cause of the claim is not covered under warranty all associated costs including parts, labour, travel and
expenses,incurredinconjunctionwithsuchrepair,replacementorrenewalshallbechargeableatMarteksstandard
servicerates.

8
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 User Manual Structure
The ECDIS User Manual contains detailed information about all the functions of the ECDIS.
The user manual consists of eight chapters each containing a number of sub-chapters. Each chapter presents
information on how to perform specific tasks using the ECDIS. The order of chapters is determined by the
order of tasks that the user faces when navigating at sea.

1.2 Typographic Conventions

The ECDIS User Manual is written under assumption that the user is familiar with the main principles of
work in the MS Windows environment and has experience in using MS Windows applications.
This manual uses certain conventions to provide a consistent mean of recognizing specific information, as
follows:
Keys are physical keys of the computer keyboard.
Buttons are displayed graphically on the screen.
Text written like Chart refers to the names of keys and buttons as well as the names of all other user
interface elements.
Program messages are written like this: Would you like to copy the database to a local hard disk?
Text written like Data Licensing Add License manually is contracted from press the Data button,
open the Licensing panel and press the Add License manually button, and presents a sequence of
commands that user should perform to reach a function.

The text written like this identifies a task, and is followed by numbered steps explaining how to do the
task.

IMPORTANT: The Important icon marks information that is crucial for correct functioning of the
system or a function.

NOTE: The Info icon marks a notice that can add important details to understanding a related topic.

The text written like this identifies a list of functions or options presented on a tab and is followed by
short descriptions of each function or option.

1.3 Normative References

The ECDIS is created in compliance with the following international standards:
IEC 60945 ed.4 2002, Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems
General requirements Methods of testing and required test results
IEC 61162-1 ed.3 2007, Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems
Digital interfaces, Part 1: Single talker and multiple listeners
IEC 61162-2 1998, Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems
Digital interfaces, Part 2: Single talker and multiple listeners, high-speed transmission

9
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 IEC 62288 ed.1 2008, Maritime navigation and radio communication equipment and systems
Presentation of navigation-related information on ship borne navigational displays General
requirements, methods of testing and required test results
IEC 61174 ed.3 2008, Maritime navigation and radio communication equipment and systems
Electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) Operational and performance
requirements, methods of testing and required test results
IHO S-52 ed.5 1996, Specifications for chart content and display aspects of ECDIS
IHO S-52, appendix 1 Guidance on updating the electronic navigational chart
IHO S-52, appendix 2 Colour and symbol specifications for ECDIS
IHO S-52, ANNEX A of APPENDIX 2 IHO ECDIS Presentation Library
IHO S-52 APPENDIX 2 ADDENDUM TO ANNEX A, PART I, Users Manual Edition 3.4 2008
Paper based description of symbols for use on ECDIS
IHO S-57, appendix B.1 2000, ENC product specification
IHO S-63 ed.1.1 2008, IHO data protection scheme
IHO CHART 1 datasets

10
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. ECDIS INTERFACE
2.1 Starting and Terminating the ECDIS
To start the ECDIS application, turn the system power on. To terminate the application press the Close
button in the upper right corner of the application window. The termination of the application turns the
system power off.

2.2 Main Window

The ECDIS starting window looks as follows:

11
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2.3 Indicators Panel

Position Source indicator has the following states:

The Position Source indicator is situated in the Navigational panel. It indicates which position source is
being used at the moment for displaying the own ship symbol in the chart view. The indicator turns orange if
the Primary Position Source fails and the Secondary Position Source is used (see chapter 7.2.1, Primary and
Secondary Position Sources).

The currently used position source is a GPS receiver set as the

primary or secondary position source in the Navi Navigation
Data tab, Position Sources tab. The indicator displays the name
of the position source as it is registered in the Config
Input/Output tab.

The currently used positioning method is dead reckoning (see

chapter 7.2.2, Dead Reckoning).

Source Scale indicator has the following states:

The Source Scale indicator turns orange if the scale of the current chart (the chart under the own ship or
under the center of the chart view) is twice or more as large or as small as the original chart scale.

The current chart scale is not twice as large or as small as the original chart scale (for
example the original scale is 1:100 000 and the current scale is 1:75 000).

The current chart scale is twice as large as the original chart scale (for example the
original scale is 1:100 000 and the current scale is 1:50 000).

The current chart scale is twice as small as the original chart scale (for example the
original scale is 1:100 000 and the current scale is 1:200 000).

12
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Scale Status indicator has the following states:
The Scale Status indicator shows if there are charts of larger scale for the current own ship position. The
indicator operates only when in navigation mode.

The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area and the best scale mode is on (see
chapter 7.5.2, Best Scale Mode). To turn the best scale mode off, left-click on the
indicator.

The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area but the best scale mode is off. To
turn the best scale mode on, left-click on the indicator.

There are larger scale charts for the area.

Navigation Mode indicator has the following states:

The Navigation Mode indicator shows if the navigation mode is on or off. Left-click on the indicator to turn
the Navigation mode on or off. The indicator also shows other ECDIS modes that are currently on.

The navigation mode is on.

The navigation mode is off.

The mariners' objects edit mode is on.

The route edit mode is on.

Data Display Type indicator has the following states:

The Data Display Type indicator shows which data display type is currently on (see chapter 5.6.2, Display
Type).

The Base display type is on. To switch to the Standard display type, left-click on the
indicator.

In addition to Base display objects, chart presentation settings adding elements to the
chart view are on (the Chart Chart Presentation tab).

The Standard display type is on. To switch to the All other display type, left-click on the
indicator.

In addition to Standard display objects, chart presentation settings adding elements to the
chart view are on (the Chart Chart Presentation tab).

The All other display type is on. All cartographic information available from the chart is
displayed.

13
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 The Custom display type is on. To switch to the Standard display type, left-click on the
indicator.

Navigation Info indicator has the following states:

The Nav Info indicator switches the current display type to Base display, turns off chart presentation settings
not required for the Base display, and removes all additional navigation information (radar, AIS targets,
ARPA targets) from the chart view.

All navigation information is displayed. Left-click on the indicator to remove the

information from the chart view.

No navigation information is displayed. Left-click on the indicator to restore the last

display state.

Periodic Date indicator has the following states:

The Periodic Date indicator shows if objects which are active only in specific periods of time during the
year are displayed only in the periods when they are active (the indicator is green) or are always displayed in
the chart view disregarding their activity periods (the indicator is orange); see chapter 5.6.7, Other Settings:
Periodic date.

The Periodic date setting is set.

The Periodic date setting is not set.

Radar Display indicator has the following states:

The Radar Display indicator shows if the radar image display is on or off (see chapter 8.4, Radar Image
Overlay). Left-click on the indicator to turn the radar image display on or off.

The radar image display is on.

The radar image display is off.

AIS Targets Display indicator has the following states:

The AIS Targets Display indicator shows if the AIS targets display is on or off (see chapter 8.2.2, AIS
Targets Display). Left-click on the indicator to turn the AIS targets display on or off.

The AIS targets display is on.

The AIS targets display is off.

14
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 ARPA Targets Display indicator has the following states:
The ARPA Targets Display indicator shows if the ARPA targets display is on or off (see chapter 8.2.2, AIS
Targets Display). Left-click on the indicator to turn the ARPA targets display on or off.

The ARPA targets display is on.

The ARPA targets display is off.

Dangers and Cautions indicator has the following states:

The Dangers and Cautions indicator shows if there are dangerous objects or cautions inside the Guard Zone
(see chapter 7.6.2, Antigrounding Alarm).

There are no dangers in the guard zone or the anti-grounding alarm function is off.

There are dangerous objects inside the guard zone. Left-click on the indicator to open the
Dangers and Cautions panel. Dangers list is displayed in the Dangers tab.

There are cautions inside the guard zone. Left-click on the indicator to open the Dangers
and Cautions panel. Cautions list is displayed in the Cautions tab.

Voyage indicator has the following states:

When in the route monitoring mode (the voyage has been started), the Voyage indicator displays warnings
regarding the own ship proceeding along the route (see chapter 7.7, Route Monitoring).

The route monitoring mode is off.

The own ship is on the route.

The own ship course deviates from the route course.

The deviation from the route (XTE) is more than the set value. Own ship is too far from
the route.

The indicator notifies that the own ship is approaching a waypoint. Set the time before the
waypoint at which the ECDIS will notify you using the Pre-turn Warning setting in the
Route Start Voyage Settings tab.

The indicator also notifies that own ship is approaching a waypoint. The indicator is
supposed to prompt the mariner to start turning. Set the time before the waypoint using
the Pre-turn Acknowledgement setting in the Route Start Voyage Settings tab.

Own ship is at the waypoint and must turn to take the next leg course.

15
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Own ship does not move or moves in the direction opposite to the direction of the route.

Own ship reached the voyage destination point.

System Warnings indicator has the following states:

The System Warnings indicator notifies the user about the caution conditions (see chapter 7.6, Alarms).

There are no caution conditions currently.

If the cautions indicator is yellow, there is a caution condition. To view caution

conditions, left-click on the indicator. The Alarms and Cautions panel will open.

Alarms indicator has the following states:

The Alarms indicator notifies the user about the alarm conditions (see chapter 7.6, Alarms).

There are no alarm conditions currently. The alarm conditions

indicator, where descriptions of alarms are displayed, is empty.

If the alarm indicator is flashing red, there is an alarm condition.

Descriptions of alarm conditions are displayed in the alarm
conditions indicator. To acknowledge a condition, left-click on
the alarm conditions indicator. To open the alarms panel, left-
click on the alarms indicator. In the panel, the list of all current
alarms is displayed.

2.4 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons Panel

Move the pointer over the scale indicator to expand the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel:

16
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
The quick access buttons provide operative access to specific ECDIS functions.

The Man Overboard button plots a MOB (man overboard) position symbol on the chart at the
own ship current position.

The Fix on ship position button plots a fix position symbol on the chart at the own ship current
position.

The ERBL tool button launches the electronic range and bearing measurement tool (ERBL).

The Check Points tool button opens the Check Points tool.

2.5 Functional Buttons Menu

The functional buttons menu is made up of eight buttons each opening a functional panel. To open the
buttons menu, move the mouse pointer over the Menu indicator in the lower right corner of the chart view.
The menu stays open while the mouse pointer is hovering over it. When the mouse pointer is out of the
menu, it is collapsed automatically.
To open a panel, press the corresponding button. Only one functional panel can be opened at a time. To
switch to another panel, press the button opening the other panel. To close an opened panel, outpress its
button.

Opens the Chart functional panel holding the following tabs: Chart Settings, Chart
Presentation, Mariner Objects, and Manual Update.

Opens the Route functional panel holding the following tabs: Start Voyage, Route
Planning, Go To, Route Finder, and Export/Import.

Opens the Info functional panel holding the following tabs: Echo Sounder Diagram,
Targets, Radar Image, System Info, Astro Info, Tides Info, Streams Info, Navi
Calculator, and Synchronization Monitor.

Opens the Log Book functional panel.

Opens the Navi functional panel holding the following tabs: Navigation Data, Own ship
past track and vector, Dead Reckoning, and LOP Position fix.

Opens the Data functional panel holding the following tabs: Chart Catalogue,
Add/Remove Database, Licensing, Dynamic Licensing, Databases, Auto Updating,
and Import S57.

Opens the Config functional panel holding the following tabs: System, Alarm Setup,
Targets, Anti Collision Tool, Own ship, Input/Output, and Units and Time.

Opens the Weather functional panel holding the following tabs: Weather Presentation
(Easy Mode), Weather Presentation, Weather Alarm Area, Weather Time Series,
and Weather Packages.

17
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2.6 Functional Panels
Functional panels hold tools used to setup and execute main ECDIS functions. To open a functional panel,
use a button from the Functional Buttons Menu. To close a panel, outpress its button in the Functional
Buttons Menu or use the Close Panel button.
Each panel may contain several tabs and sub-tabs. Each panel also has a set of buttons with general
functions.

Clear Highlight removes highlighting from the chart view. Highlighting made by any
function can be removed from the chart view using the general Clear Highlight button.

Restore Down restores the functional panel to its default size. To resize a panel, move the

mouse pointer to the upper border of the panel and when it changes to the resize pointer ,
drag the panel up.

Auto Hide pins the panel down. If the panel is not pinned down, it is reduced so that to
display only its tabs names after the mouse pointer is removed from the panel. To pin the panel
down, press the Auto Hide button. When the pin on the button is vertical, the panel is pinned
down; when the pin is horizontal, the auto hide mode is on and the panel collapses after you
move the mouse pointer out of it.

Back to previous chart view restores the previous chart view (coordinates and scale).

Close panel closes the panel.

The buttons are located in the upper right corner of each panel.

Figure 1 Clear Highlight, Restore Down, Auto Hide, Back, and Close panel buttons

18
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2.7 Hotkeys List

The following hotkeys are used in the ECDIS:

F8 MOB mode On
F9 Switches between Standard/All Other
display types
F12 Switches between Night/Day palettes
Page up Zoom in
Page down Zoom out

19
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. ECDIS SETUP
3.1 Input/Output
Data about the own vessel position, course, speed and other vessel movement characteristics, as well as the
data about the surrounding conditions are received using special navigation devices such as positioning
devices, gyro devices, and other sensors input devices. The data received from the input devices is
processed and presented in the ECDIS application. The data can also be transmitted to other devices such as
ARPA display and others output devices. For the data to be received and transmitted by the ECDIS
application, the input and output sensors must be connected to the system using the system COM and USB
ports and registered in the ECDIS application.

3.1.1 Adding, editing and deleting input/output devices

IMPORTANT:

The input/output configuration is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password.
The input/output configuration requires separate licensing. Make sure that the ECDIS I/O license for the
software module is installed on your system.

NOTE:
A special input/output configuration file io.lines.xml may be used for input/output setup. The file
contains description of communication lines and is located in the [C:\ECDISDATA\Config\] folder. If
the file is used, the input/output interface is slightly different than that without the configuration file. The
differences will be described as special notes in specific features descriptions.

Registration of input and output navigation devices is carried out in the Config Input/Output tab. To
register a device, add it to the Talkers list.

Figure 2 Config Input/Output tab

NOTE:
For a change in the Input/Output configuration to take effect, press the Save Settings button. If there are
any changes that have not been saved, the Save Settings button name has an asterisk .

20
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To add a new talker, do the following:
1. To add an input/output device, press the New button. The Talker Setup dialog opens.

Figure 3 Talker Setup dialog

2. Set the device parameters in the Talker Setup dialog.
Device Name Name of the transmitting device.
Device Type Choose the type of the transmitting device from the drop-down list.
TalkerID Talker identification.
Communication line/Baud rate Select the communication channel and the channel baud rate
from the corresponding drop-down lists.
Retransmission line/Baud rate Select the retransmission communication channel and the
channel baud rate from the corresponding drop-down lists. Use the function if you want to
retransmit received AIS messages to other computers connected to your computer through a
network.
Time Out The timeout before an alarm is given after the signal from the device is lost.
Ignore CRC When receiving sentences from a device, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) is used to
check the sentences checksum. If an error in checksum is detected, an alarm is given and displayed
in the Alarm conditions indicator and the sentence is not received. To ignore CRC errors for a
device, check the Ignore CRC checkbox. If the checkbox is set, an alarm is still given in case of a
CRC error, but the sentence is received.
NOTE: if an io.lines.xml configuration file is used, the Communication line/Baud rate and
Retransmission line/Baud rate settings are replaced with the Communication line name and
Retransmission line name settings. To set both of the settings, select an option from the drop-down
lists.

21
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 4 Talker Setup dialog, interface for the io.lines.xml configuration file
3. In the Listen For section, check the message types which the ECDIS application will listen to and parse.
If no message type is selected, the ECDIS will parse all types of messages coming from the device.
4. Press the Apply button to add the device to the devices list or Cancel to cancel the operation.

IMPORTANT:

You can restore previous settings unless you have pressed the Save Settings button in the Config
Input/Output tab. Once the Save Settings button has been pressed, previous settings cannot be restored. To
restore settings, press the Restore Settings button.

5. After the device has been added to the devices list press the Save Settings button in the Config
Input/Output tab for the changes to take effect.
6. Enter the password in the Password required dialog and press OK. The changes will take effect.

To edit parameters of a device, do the following:

1. Select the device in the list and press the Edit button. The Talker Setup dialog will open.
2. In the Talker Setup dialog change the device parameters.
3. Press the Apply button to add changes to the devices list. Press the Cancel button to cancel the
operation. The Talker Setup dialog will close.
4. Press the Save Settings button in the Config Input/Output panel for the changes to take effect.
5. Enter the password to the Password required dialog and press OK. The changes will take effect.

To delete a device, do the following:

1. Select the device in the list and press the Delete button. The device will be deleted from the list.
2. Press the Save Settings button for the changes to take effect.
3. Enter the password to the Password required dialog and press OK. The changes will take effect.

22
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3.1.2 Monitoring serial line
You can monitor the serial line to determine if a specified communication channel and the channel baud rate
are configured correctly and the system receives messages over the specified channel.

To monitor serial line, do the following:

1. Press the Line Monitor button in the Config Input/Output tab. The Line Monitor window will
open.

Figure 5 Line Monitor window

2. In the Line Monitor window, select the communication line from the drop-down list next to the Close
button. In case the communication line is a COM port, select the line baud rate from the drop-down list
next to the lines list. In case the communication line is a TCP/IP or a virtual line, enter the local port
number to the Local Port field.
NOTE: if an io.lines.xml configuration file is used, the drop-down list next to the Close button
contains a list of communication lines described in the configuration file. Select the line to monitor in the
list.
3. Check the Activate Log checkbox if you want all received messages to be written to a log file
[C:\ECDISDATA\Debug\LineMonitor.txt].
4. Press the Start button (the button label will change to Stop). If messages are being received they are
displayed in the window (what you see is AIS messages in the official format).
5. To clear the window, press the Clear Monitor button.
6. To stop monitoring press the Stop button.
7. To close the Line Monitor window, press the Close button.

23
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3.2 Own Ship Data

IMPORTANT:

The own ship data configuration is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password.
However, the own ship current draft can be changed without the password provided no other own ship
parameter has been changed.

Configuring operating parameters of the own ship is very important for the correct functioning of the system.
The own ship parameters are configured in the Config Own Ship Own ship setup tab. Here you can
introduce parameters of the own ship and set precise location of various devices onboard.

Figure 6 Config Own ship tab, Own ship setup tab

NOTE:
For a change in the Own Ship configuration to take effect, press the Save settings button. If there are any
changes that have not been saved, the Save Settings button name has an asterisk .

To set the own ship parameters, do the following:

1. Open the Config Own Ship Own ship setup tab.
2. Unlock the own ship settings: press the Unlock button and enter the password. If the password is correct,
the settings are ungreyed and you can change them.
3. In the tab, enter values of the parameters to the fields corresponding to the parameters:
LOA-max Length Maximum length of the vessel.
B-max beam Maximum beam of the vessel.
Hm-max height Maximum height of the vessel including the mast.
Hb-bridge height Height of the bridge.
Speed Speed in knots.
Tmax-max draft Maximum draft of the vessel.
T-current draft Current draft of the vessel.

24
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Turn radius starboard Starboard turn radius.
Turn radius port Port turn radius.
Minimal ship width on screen If the width of the scaled own ship symbol in the scale of the
currently displayed chart is less than the parameter value, the scaled symbol changes to the point
symbol.
4. After the parameters have been entered, press the Save Settings button: the settings are saved and
become locked again.
5. To restore previously saved settings, press the Restore Settings button. It is impossible to restore the
previous settings after the new settings have been saved.

NOTE:
Measurement units for the own ship parameters are set in the Config Units and Time tab.

To set precise locations of positioning and other devices onboard the own ship, do the following:
1. Open the Config Own Ship Position of instruments tab. Here you can set the precise location for
all positioning devices registered in the Config Input/Output tab as well as radar and other devices
onboard the own ship.

Figure 7 Config Own ship tab, Position devices tab

2. Unlock the position settings: press the Unlock button and enter the password. If the password is correct,
the settings are ungreyed and you can change them.
3. Set the conning station offset from the center of the vessel:
Conning station X offset Distance from the conning station to the centre of the vessel along the
x- axis.
Conning station Y offset Distance from the conning station to the centre of the vessel along the
y-axis.
4. Select a device in the Select instrument list and set parameters for the device. The parameters are:
X offset Distance from the vessel conning station to the device along the x-axis.
Y offset Distance from the vessel conning station to the device along the y-axis.

25
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. After the parameters have been entered, press the Save Settings button: the settings are saved and
become locked again.
6. To restore previously saved settings, press the Restore Settings button. It is impossible to restore the
previous settings after the new settings have been saved.
7. The LOP Position fix adv. parameters button opens for editing the MODevices.config.xml file
where you can enter values of RMS and fixed corrections for observation devices for the LOP position
fix function (see chapter 7.2.3, Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs)

NOTE:
Measurement units for the device offsets are set in the Config Units and Time tab.

3.3 System Setup

3.3.1 Measurement Units and Time

To set the measurement units for various values such as distance, speed, depth, elevation, and various
dimensions, use the options provided in the Config Units and Time tab. In the tab you can also set the
time parameters: select the time zone you are sailing in, set the daylight saving time if necessary, as well as
select the format of the date display.

Figure 8 Config Units and Time tab

To set measurement units, do the following:

1. To set the measurement unit for depths, elevations, and dimensions, select the unit in the
Depth/Elevation/Size Units list. The setting is applied immediately. The selected unit is indicated by the
Depth/Elevation Unit Indicator in the lower left corner of the chart view.
2. To set the measurement unit for distances, select the unit in the Distance Units list. The setting is applied
immediately.
3. To set the measurement unit for speed, select the unit in the Speed Units list. The setting is applied
immediately.

26
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To set time parameters, do the following:
1. To set the time zone, select the time zone from the time zones drop-down list. For the setting to take
effect, press the Apply button.
2. To set the daylight saving, enter the value in minutes to the Daylight Bias field. For the setting to take
effect, press the Apply button.
3. To set the time format, select the format in the Date Format list. The setting is applied immediately.

NOTE:
The current onboard time is indicated in the Time and Date line of the Navigational panel. The time value is
calculated using the UTC time value received from the positioning device plus the time zone offset. To see
the UTC time, left-click on the Time and Date line and hold the button: the time changes to the UTC time.
When you release the button, the time changes back to the onboard time.

3.3.2 System Check-up

While working with the ECDIS, you need to be aware of the system current state. The access to the system
check-up information is provided in the Info System Info tab.
The system check-up includes checking databases status (Databases status tab), licenses status (Licenses
status tab), disks status (Disks status tab), and talkers status (Talkers status tab).
To perform the system check-up at the ECDIS startup, check the Perform check on startup checkbox. To
refresh the system check-up information, press the Refresh info button (while the refreshing procedure is
running the button label is Abort).
During the system check-up the message indicating the process running appears in the Alarms indicator
. Once acknowledged, the message is removed from the current alarms list.
In case the Perform check on startup checkbox is not set, the check-up is carried out automatically every
seven days.

Figure 9 Info System Info tab

27
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3.3.3 Diagnostics Info
The system check-up information may be not enough for solving ECDIS operation issues. If you need
complete information on the current state of your system, use the Collect Diagnostics Info option available
in the Info System Info tab.

To collect and save diagnostics information, do the following:

1. Open the Info System Info tab.
2. Press the Collect Diagnostics Info button: information will be collected and saved to a file; the Save
Diagnostics Info button will become active.
3. To save the diagnostics information file to an external device, press the Save Diagnostics Info button,
indicate the location where the file is to be saved in the Locate the destination folder dialog and press
Export: the file will be saved to the indicated location.

Figure 10 Locate destination folder dialog

The diagnostics file contains the following information:

System information (OS Name, Manufacturer, Architecture, Version, Language, Status, System
Root, System Directory, User Account Control, Internet Explorer Version)
CPU information (Vendor, Model, Model No., Architecture, Stepping, Number of CPU, each CPU
data)
Memory information (Total Physical Memory, Free Physical Memory, Total Swap Memory, Free
Swap Memory, Total Virtual Memory, Free Virtual Memory)
File system information (Device Name, Device Type, File System, Read Only, Capacity, Free
Space)
Video controller information (Name, Chipset Vendor, Driver Version, Mode, Memory, Horizontal
Resolution, Vertical Resolution, Refresh Rate, Bits per Pixel, Number of Colors, Status)
PKI infrastructure information (Vendor, Description, Hardware Version, Firmware Version,
Hardware Slot, Removable Device, Token Present)
Windows registry information SDK registry entries
System log information
eToken PKI Client information (Name, Installation location, Version, Major, Minor)
File structure of folders where databases and database updates are stored
C-Map Professional SDK Runtime 5.2 information
File structure and log files from the 'C:\ECDISDATA' folder

28
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 File structure and log files from the 'C:\Program Files <x86>\ECDIS' folder
ECDIS 6.0 information

3.3.4 Disk Space Control

To work properly ECDIS requires a certain amount of free disk space. Control of free disk space is
performed every 30 minutes and, in case the space amount is less than required, a Critical free disk space
warning appears suggesting you take measures to clean up the disk. In the warning recommendations and
automatic cleanup options are provided.

Figure 11 Critical free disk space warning

3.3.5 System Information

The Info System Info tab gives the user easy access to the System ID and the version of the CM-93/3
SDK installed. The system ID is a unique ID required for all systems that use CM-93/3 chart databases and
should be the same as the one written on the C-MAP eToken dongle.

To save the system information to a file, do the following:

1. Press the Copy User.usr file button. The Copy User.usr file dialog will open.
2. In the Copy User.usr file dialog, select a folder where to save the file and press the Export button. The
file will be saved to the specified location.

29
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3.3.6 Color Differentiation Test
The color generating capability of any type of display screen will deteriorate with age and the Color
Differentiation Test diagram is provided to enable the mariner to verify that his display screen still retains the
color differentiation capability needed to distinguish between the various color-coded areas, lines and point
symbols of the ECDIS display.
The system is delivered fully color adjusted to meet ECDIS specifications, however we have implemented
brightness control (see chapter 3.3.7) for personal adjustment.
If adjustment is needed per below description we recommend that screen is sent for adjustment at Martek
Marine or a certified technician is called. The technician will bring the needed interface to fully adjust the
screen and verify correct ECDIS colors. The contrast settings can only be changed by Martek Marine or a
certified technician.
The Color Test should be applied on the day and dusk color palettes (see chapter 7.5.3, Chart Display
Palettes).
Before the Color Test diagram is used, the black-adjust symbol SY(BLKADJ) should be brought up on the
screen and the contrast and brightness controls (or equivalent controls for an LCD) should be adjusted in a
specific way.

To bring up the black-adjust symbol, do the following:

1. Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered (see chapter 4.1, Installing and Displaying
Database) and added to the view (see chapter 4.1.2Displaying Database).
2. Open the Data Chart Catalogue tab. In the databases drop-down list, select the ChartletsBase
database. Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop-down list.
3. Double-click on the AA5C1AB2 dataset (the dataset contains the black-adjust symbol). The chart view
will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset. The black-adjust symbol will be displayed
in the chart view.
4. If you cant see the black-adjust symbol, make sure the following arrangements are made:

a. the display type is set to All other the display type indicator is All other ;
b. the chart presentation type is set to S52 the S52 option is selected in the Chart Chart
Presentation tab, Presentation section;
c. the chart view scale is larger than 1:16 500.

To adjust the contrast and brightness control, do the following:

1. First, set contrast to a maximum, brightness to a minimum. Look at the black-adjust symbol.
2. Then if the centre square is not visible, turn up the brightness until it just appears.
3. Or, if the centre square is clearly visible (with contrast at maximum, brightness at minimum), turn the
contrast down until the inner square disappears, then turn contrast back up until the inner square is just
visible again.
4. If the above adjustment is not successful, select a more appropriate chart display palette and repeat this
procedure.
5. The "black level" is then correctly set. If a brighter display is required use the contrast control, but
preferably do not adjust the controls unless lighting conditions on the bridge change.

30
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
After the black level has been set, you can proceed with the color test. For the test you need to display the
color differentiation diagram in the chart view.

To open the color diagram, do the following:

1. Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered (see chapter 4.1, Installing and Displaying
Database) and added to the view (see chapter 4.1.2Displaying Database).
2. Open the Data Chart Catalogue tab. In the databases drop-down list, select the ChartletsBase
database. Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop-down list.
3. Double-click on the AA5C1WOO dataset (the dataset contains the color differentiation test diagram).
The chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset. The color diagram will be
brought up to the chart view.
4. If you cant see the color test diagram, make sure the following arrangements are made:

a. the display type is set to All other the display type indicator is All other ;
b. the chart presentation type is set to S52 the S52 option is selected in the Chart Chart
Presentation tab, Presentation section;
c. the chart view scale is larger than 1:16 500.
5. The diagram consists of twenty squares extending over the whole of a 350x270 mm (approx) screen.
Each square is colored with one of the four main background area shades (such as shallow water blue,
DEPVS), and each carries a two-pixel wide diagonal line in one of the important line or symbol
foreground colors (such as planned route red, PLRTE).
6. The color differentiation test consists of being able to distinguish the background colors and to pick out
the like foreground colors, i.e. to say that squares 3, 5, 11, 15, 18 and 20 all have a shallow water blue
background, and that squares 3, 10 and 17 have a grey line.

31
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3.3.7 Brightness Control of Screen
The iECDIS system does have the possibility to adjust level of light and colour pallet. This you can see in
this manual in section 7.5.3. In addition to this we have implemented a brightness control, so you can adjust
the screen beyond the fixed settings for Day Dusk Night mode. The control of the level of light is done
by pressing the following keys:

F1markedwiththissymbol:

This Function key will dim the light level (make is more dark)

F2markedwiththissymbol

This Function key will increase the light (make it more bright)

F3markedwiththissymbol

This Function key will set the light to default level for the selected mode (Day Dusk Night)

F12markedwiththissymbol

This Function key is controlling the internal colour pallet and default level of light, and by this hot key you
can toggle between Day and Night modes only.

32
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
When the light have been changed to a value outside the default one, then an icon will be shown in the lower
right side of the screen. Its a yellow mark with the test Light.

Auto alignment of the screen

If the screen for some reason gets misaligned, you can by pressing the windows key on the keypad activate
the Martek Main Menu:

Here you can align the screen by clicking with the left mouse button. You only have to do this one time if
need be, as this is an automated procedure.

33
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3.4 Updating ECDIS Software
To update the ECDIS software you need a CD or DVD with the new version of software.

To update ECDIS software, do the following:

1. Insert the CD-ROM disk into the CD-ROM drive.
2. The ECDIS setup program will be launched automatically.
3. Follow instructions of the setup program.
4. The setup program will install updated components to the same location where previously installed
components are.

3.5 Data Synchronization

The ECDIS implements a data synchronization technology designed to synchronize a single set of data
between all computers connected into a local network by automatically copying all changes introduced to the
data back and forth.
Data to be synchronized are:
databases including blobs, updates and manual updates;
mariner objects;
routes;
S-63 data;
input/output configuration data;
own ship settings.

NOTE:
Synchronization requires free disk space of the same size as the size of all registered databases. For
example, if the database size is 3 GB required amount of free space is also 3 GB (of course, 3.5 or even 4 GB
of free space would be better).

3.5.1 Synchronization Operation

The process of data synchronization works the following way:
1. Some changes to a data object on Node 1 are introduced.
2. The Node 1 synchronization component collects metadata about the modified data object and sends them
to all other nodes over the local network.
3. Other nodes compare their data objects with the metadata received from Node 1.
4. If they find that their data objects should be updated to the state of the modified data object from Node 1,
they send a request to the Node 1 and download the modified data object instead of theirs.

34
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3.5.2 Synchronization Setup

NOTE:
Synchronization setup is done using a set of *.xml configuration files and is available only to system
administrators.

Programming component in charge of data synchronization is made up of two parts:

DataObject component collects metadata about data objects to be synchronized and passes them
to the DataProvider component;
DataProvider component synchronizes the data with nodes connected into a local network.
The DataObject component is set up through the Objects.xml file; the DataProvider component is set up
through the Providers.xml file; the network nodes are specified in the ClientsList.xml file.

To configure synchronization, do the following:

1. When first starting ECDIS, shut down the synchronization process (Synchronization.exe) and exit the
ECDIS software.
2. Check for MetaDataStorage.tmp, PublishTasks.tmp and ApplyTasks.tmp files in the
C:\Program Files\ECDIS\Synchronization\ folder. If you find these files in the folder,
delete them.
3. Edit *.xml configuration files. To configure synchronization, three *.xml files are used (the files are
located in the C:\Program Files\ECDIS\Synchronization\ folder):
ClientsList.xml describes computer nodes participating in synchronization;
Objects.xml describes programming components to be used for collecting metadata for data
objects that should be synchronized as well as data objects themselves (object types, paths to the
objects, etc.)
Providers.xml specifies which synchronization providers (special programming components)
should be used to synchronize data of various types.
4. In the ClientsList.xml file:
Enter information about the host computer in the <selfInfo> tag which has the following
attributes:
uid a unique identifier of the computer, in all other ClientsList.xml files this id is
used to specify this computer;
priority the computer priority used to select which data are to be overwritten in case the
time when the data were modified is the same for two computers; make sure the priorities set
to the nodes are not the same, otherwise data to be overwritten are selected at random.
Enter information about other nodes in the <nodes> section: each node is described by its
<node> tag with the following attributes:
uid a unique identifier of the node, in all other ClientsList.xml files this id is used
to specify this node;
location IP address of the node.

35
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. In the Objects.xml file you can:
Remove a data object from the synchronization process. To do so, delete or comment out the
<DataObject> section for this data object (dont forget to remove or comment out the data
provider corresponding to the data object in the Providers.xml file).
Add a data object to the synchronization process. To do so, add a <DataObject> section for this
object (not necessarily connected with ECDIS, it can be any data).
<DataObject> tag is a child tag for the <DataObjects> tag; it describes programming
components for collecting metadata for data objects and has the following attributes:
path path to the *.dll file of the programming component;
datatype type of data to be synchronized using the specified component; the attribute
connects the component collecting metadata with a data provider component described in the
Providers.xml file;
uid unique identifier of a data object to be synchronized; used if there are several data
objects of the same type that should be synchronized separately.
Add a file or a folder to the list of files or folders of any data object to be synchronized. To do so,
add an <Entry> tag to the <Objects> section of the <DataObject> section.
<Objects> tag is a child tag for the <DataObject> tag; it describes files or folders that contain
specified data objects. Each description is written to a separate <Entry> tag with the following
attributes:
type specifies if the data to be synchronized are contained in a file or folder;
path path to the file or folder;
recursive only for folders; specifies that all files contained in the folder and its
subfolders should be processed;
exclude filter to exclude some files or subfolders from synchronization.
For databases the <DataObject> tag has the following format:
<DataObject path = "DataObjects\DatabasesDataObject.dll" />.
6. In the Providers.xml file you can:
Remove a data provider if the corresponding data object was removed in the Objects.xml file.
To do so, delete or comment out a corresponding <DataProvider> section.
Assign another type of data provider for work with a data object.
There are three data provider types available:
Generic Data Provider compares files file-by-file and writes the newer file over the older
one (see Figure 1);

Figure 12 Generic Data Provider operation scheme

36
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Union Data Provider compares sets of files from the nodes and writes the file set with
latest modifications (even if only one file was changed) over the set where modifications, no
matter how many, were introduced earlier;

Figure 13 Union Data Provider operation scheme

Databases Data Provider is used only for synchronizing databases; other data providers
cannot be used for databases.
7. After editing the configuration files, launch the ECDIS software: now synchronization is configured and
operates properly.

3.5.3 Synchronization Monitor

Data synchronization is an automatic process over which the user has no control. Information about the
current activities and status of the data synchronization is displayed in the Info Synchronization
Monitor tab.
To clear the Synchronization log tab, press the Clear log button.

Figure 14 Info Synchronization Monitor tab

37
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. INSTALLING DATA
4.1 Installing and Displaying Databases

4.1.1 Installing Databases

Installing chart databases on your system includes copying the databases to the system hard disk and
registering them in the ECDIS application. Installing can be done in the Data Databases tab.

To install a database, do the following:

1. Open the Data Databases tab.

Figure 15 Data Databases tab

2. Connect the data storage device with the database to the system and press the Find databases button.
Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system. All detected databases are
listed in the Available databases pane (name and issue number).
3. Select the database name in the Available databases pane: the Register database
and Check signature buttons become active. The Check signature button only
becomes active if the signature check is available for the selected database.
Figure 16 Signature
4. To check the database signature, press the Check signature button. The signature check in progress
check progress is displayed in the Signature check progress dialog. To cancel dialog
the procedure, press the Abort button.
Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results appears.

NOTE:
The signature check may help identify problems with the data authenticity and integrity. In case any
problems have been identified in the course of the signature check, contact the database provider to settle
them.

5. To install the database, select the database in the Available databases pane and press the Register
database button: the database is copied to a pre-defined location on the system hard disk and registered
automatically. The database is added to the Registered DB list.

38
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6. The following operations can be carried out with registered databases: integrity check, signature check,
and unregistering:
To check the integrity of a registered database (if available), select the database in the Registered
DB list and press the Check integrity button (the button becomes active if integrity check is
available for the database).
Upon the termination of the integrity check a message with the information on the check results
appears.

NOTE:
The integrity check may help identify problems with the updates data integrity. In case any problems have
been identified in the course of the integrity check procedure, contact the updates provider to settle them.

To check the signature of a database, select the database in the Registered DB list and press the
Check signature button (the button becomes active if the signature check is available for the
selected database).
Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results
appears.
To unregister a database, select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Unregister
database button. The database will be unregistered.

IMPORTANT:

If you unregister a database, it is deleted from the system hard disk. To restore data, you will need to obtain
the database saved on a removable data storage device and install the database once more.

After the database has been installed, it has to be added to view (see chapter 4.1.2, Displaying Database) and
licensed (see chapter 4.2, Licensing Data) if licensing is necessary.

39
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4.1.2 Displaying Databases
To display data from a database on the system screen, the database should be added to the view. If you have
installed several databases you can hide databases you dont need at the moment and display those that you
need.

To add a database to the view, do the following:

1. Open the Data Add/Remove Database tab. All registered but not added to the view databases are
listed in the Registered Databases pane; all registered and added to the view databases are listed in the
Databases in View pane.

NOTE:
Generally, databases are automatically added to the view in the process of registration.

Figure 17 Data Add/Remove Database tab

2. To add a database to the view, select the database in the Registered Databases list and press the Add
Database button. The database name will be moved to the Databases in View list and the data from the
database will be displayed in the chart view.
3. To remove a database from the view, select the database in the Databases in View list and press the
Remove Database button. The database name will be moved back to the Registered Databases list and
the data removed from the chart view.
4. To refresh the Registered Databases and Databases in View lists (in case they were modified using
external tools), press the Refresh button.

40
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4.2 Licensing Data
Cartographic data stored in chart databases produced by Jeppesen are protected from unauthorized use by
licenses. Licenses allow viewing all charts available for a specified area in the database: without licenses you
can only view small scale charts. Licenses are available for worldwide coverage or any combination of
Zones, Areas, or Cells. You have to purchase and install licenses for the coverage you have selected.
The entire world coverage is divided into 9 Zones. Each Zone is divided into several Areas. Some Zones are
also divided into Cells (4X4 degrees) and special areas. You may have a license for any combination of
Zones, Areas, and Cells.

NOTE:
Zones are specified by their numbers from Zone 0(World coverage) to Zone 10.
Areas are specified by Zones to which they belong and their numbers in the Zones, e.g. Zone 1, Area 3.
Cells are regarded as Areas and their numbering continues after the numbering of Areas in a Zone. For
example, the first Cell in the Zone 2 is listed as Zone 2, Area 7. As there are six Areas in that Zone, Areas
following the Zone 2, Area 6 are actually Cells.

To obtain a license for the coverage you need for a voyage, you should come to your charts supplier with
your eToken and after settling purchase formalities, you will be provided with the licenses file.
You can also order licenses by e-mail or by phone. To do so, you will have to provide your System ID
number to your chart suppliers.

IMPORTANT:

The System ID is necessary for issuing licenses. It is unique for your system and stored in the eToken. Each
license is issued for a specified System ID. You will be able to use a license only if it is issued for your
System ID and only if the correct eToken is connected to the system.
The System ID information is available in the Data Licensing tab and in the Info System Info tab.

For details about ordering and purchasing licenses, contact your charts supplier.
After the licenses have been obtained (as a licenses file or as 16-digit license codes), they must be installed
on the system to enable the ECDIS application to decrypt and use the data (for the chart database, only the
coverage for which you have purchased licenses can be displayed).

41
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4.2.1 Installing Licenses Manually
You can install licenses manually if you have 16-digit license codes.

To install a license manually, do the following:

1. Open the Data Licensing tab.
2. In the Databases drop-down list select the database for which you are applying the license.
3. Press the Add manually button to open the pane for manual licenses installation.

Figure 18 Data Licensing tab, Add Licenses manually

4. In the areas list select the areas for which the license is generated. Your selection will be displayed in the
Data Set or Area Name field above the list.
5. Enter manually or copy and paste the 16-digit code to the License string field.
6. Please ensure that you have an eToken connected to the system. The eToken must be the one used during
installation.
7. Press the Add License button. The process will take a few seconds. Upon completion, a message License
has been added successfully will appear. Press OK.

NOTE:
Note that when you enter information in the Data Set or Area Name field for Professional+ databases, you
will only find Zones and Areas. Cells are also listed as areas in this list. All Cells, Areas and Additional
Areas within a Zone have a unique number. For example the cell 94B in Zone 1 will be listed as Zone 1,
Area 91.

4.2.2 Installing Licenses from File

If you have a license file, you can install all licenses stored in the file using the Add Licenses from File
function.

To install licenses from file, do the following:

1. Connect the removable data storage device with license file to the system. License files should be stored
in a folder named Licenses for the ECDIS to be able to detect them.
2. Open the Data Licensing tab.

42
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. In the Databases drop-down list, select the database for which you are applying the license.
4. Press the Add Licenses from file button to open the pane for adding licenses from file.
5. Press the Find licenses button to start searching for license files on all removable devices connected to
the system. All detected licenses are listed in the upper window of the pane (the name and issue number
of the database for which the license is issued and the license expiration date). Select a license to view
the path to the license file, the license coverage and the license code in the lower window of the pane.

Figure 19 Data Licensing tab, Add Licenses from file

6. To install licenses, select the license file with licenses to be installed and press the Apply license button.
Licenses will be installed and registered automatically. The licenses installation process will take a few
seconds. Upon completion, a message Licensing completed will appear.
7. After the license has been installed, the licensed data are displayed on the screen immediately.

4.2.3 Getting Licenses Expiring Before a Specified Date

You can get a list of licenses that expire before a specified date.

To view the list of licenses expiring before a specified date, do the following:
1. Open the Data Licensing tab.
2. In the Databases drop-down list select a database.
3. Press the Display expired licenses before date button to open the pane where you can view the licenses
expiring before a specified date.
4. In the date field enter the licenses expiry limit date and press the Display expired licenses before date
button. In the list below all licenses that expire before the specified date will be displayed.

43
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 20 Data Licensing tab, Display expired licenses before date

4.2.4 Viewing Licenses List

You can view the list of all licenses applied to a specified database. To do so:

To view the list of installed licenses, do the following:

1. Open the Data Licensing panel.
2. In the Databases drop-down list select a database.
3. Press the Licenses list button. The licenses list will be displayed in the licenses list pane. The
information displayed for each license includes expiry date, coverage, and license code.

4.2.5 Dynamic Licensing

Jeppesen provides its clients with a new service: dynamic licensing. Dynamic licensing gives clients the
possibility to pay for licenses for single charts that were actually viewed rather than for licenses for a whole
database or a chart collection.

To activate the dynamic licensing service, do the following:

1. Contact Jeppesen and subscribe to the dynamic licensing service. You will be registered on the server. In
the subscription, databases and chart collections available to you will be specified.
2. To activate the service, send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or, in case of a
local network, from the server computer (see chapters 6.2.1, Automatic Updating and 6.2.2, Semi-
automatic Updating).
3. In response, the updates server sends updates for already licensed datasets, if there are any, and the
dynamic licensing initialization answer. The initialization answer contains:
The System ID of the system the answer is intended for;
Indication of an action to be performed (Activate or Stop the service, or Change the service terms);
Credit value, which is a part of the overall bridge credit;
Mandatory report date for not reported charts; if a chart is not reported before the date, the access to
all data (both reported and not reported datasets) is denied and can only be resumed after the chart
use is reported and confirmed;

44
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. The dynamic licensing information (credit value, collection keys, and next mandatory report date) is
written to the eToken.
5. In case of a local network, the dynamic licensing information is distributed over the network to all nodes.
6. After the subscription has been activated, the following information is displayed in the Data Dynamic
Licensing tab:
credit rest in the Credit Rest field, the credit rest value is sent to you each time you receive
updates;
next mandatory report date in the Next Report Date field;
last confirmation date in the Last Confirmation Date field;
the list of databases available for dynamic licensing in the Available Databases list;
the list of collections available for dynamic licensing in a specified database in the Available
Collections list (the collections are listed in your subscription);

Figure 21 Data Dynamic Licensing tab, data displayed after the service activation

There are three ways to view charts using dynamic licensing:

you can use dynamic licensing for all charts without any restrictions;
you can limit dynamic licensing of charts by a specified range around the own ship;
you can use dynamic licensing only for charts along a specified route.

To use dynamic licensing without restrictions, do the following:

1. Make sure that the Enable Dynamic Licensing checkbox in the Data Dynamic Licensing tab is
checked and the Dynamic licensing by range checkbox is cleared.
2. Scroll the chart view to the chart you want to open and zoom in. The chart will be opened and added to
the non-reported charts list. The price of the chart will be deducted from the credit rest value. To view
the non-reported charts list, open the Non Reported tab; and to view the reported charts list, open the
Reported tab. In both lists names and data access expiry dates are displayed.

NOTE:
You can only view charts of the collections you are subscribed to.

45
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. To display outlines of dynamically licensed charts, press the Show licensed charts button: the chart
outlines with chart names will be displayed. To hide the outlines, outpress the Show licensed charts
button.
4. To refresh the data displayed in the Data Dynamic Licensing tab, press the Refresh button.
5. The use of charts should be reported to the server within a specified time: the mandatory date of the next
report. If you fail to report the charts, you will be denied access to both reported and non-reported charts.
To resume the access to data all charts should be reported and confirmed.
6. To report the use of charts, request updates using automatic or semi-automatic updating functionality
(see chapters 6.2.1, Automatic Updating and 6.2.2, Semi-automatic Updating). Reports on the use of
dynamically licensed data are sent automatically together with the update request; and the confirmation
answers containing new credit rest value, new date of mandatory report and expiry date for all reported
charts are sent back with updates.

To limit dynamic licensing of charts by a specified range around the own ship, do the following:
1. Make sure that the Enable Dynamic Licensing checkbox in the Data Dynamic Licensing tab is
checked.
2. Check the Dynamic licensing by range checkbox.
3. Enter a range value to the Dynamic licensing by range field: all charts available for display at the
current chart view scale will be opened. To open charts with larger scale zoom in.

To limit dynamic licensing of charts by a specified route, do the following:

1. Press the Open charts along route button: the Select route window with a list of created routes will
open. The Enable Dynamic Licensing checkbox does not affect this functionality and may be cleared.

Figure 22 Select route window

2. Select a route and press OK: charts along the specified route will be opened. Chart with largest available
scales are selected.

To change terms of the dynamic licensing service or to terminate the service, do the following:
1. Contact Jeppesen and agree on the terms changes or the service termination. The changes will be
registered on the server.
2. To activate the changes, send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or, in case of
a local network, from the server computer (see chapters 6.2.1, Automatic Updating and 6.2.2, Semi-
automatic Updating). In response, the server sends updates for already licensed datasets, if there are any,
and the dynamic licensing initialization answer where the action to be performed (terms changes or
service termination) will be indicated.

46
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4.3 Installing New Version of the Database
Cartographic data are likely to change often. These changes are applied to databases in the form of updates.
Later the updates are included in the database as regular data and a new version of the database is issued.
These issues are made regularly and if you are a Jeppesen customer, you are provided with the new versions
of the CM-93/3 chart database as soon as it is issued.

To install a new version of the database, do the following:

1. Open the Data Databases tab.
2. Connect the data storage device with the new version of the database to the system and press the Find
databases button. Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system. All
detected databases are listed in the Available databases pane (name and issue number). Currently
registered databases are displayed in the Registered DB list.

Figure 23 Data Databases tab, current version database in the Registered DB list, new version database
in the Available databases list
3. Select the new version database in the Available databases list and press the Register database button.
The message The database Professional+, issue: 349 already registered. Do you want to update it
with database Professional+, issue: 364?. Press the YES button.
4. The old version of the database will be overwritten with the new version. The new version is registered
and added to the view automatically.

NOTE:
It is important to note that all existing licenses will be valid after the new version of the database is installed
and you will not need to request new licenses.

47
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4.4 Licensing Software Modules
The ECDIS application includes functional modules that require individual licensing. These modules are
Import S-57, Anticollision, Ship Model, and ECDIS Input/Output.
Import S-57 module performing import of cartographic data from the S-57 format to the CM93v3
format.
Anticollision module performing estimation of collision danger of the own ship and an AIS or
ARPA target.
ECDIS Input/Output module controlling connection of input/out devices to the system and
processing data coming from the devices.
Licensing of software modules is performed in the same way as licensing of cartographic data. To carry out
operations with licenses of software modules, in the Data Licensing tab, select Software Modules from
the Databases drop-down list. After that all other operations with installing of licenses are identical to the
operations for installing data licenses.

4.5 ENC Data in S-57 Format

4.5.1 S-63 Protection of ENC Data

The ECDIS fully implements the IHO data protection scheme (S-63). All elements of the scheme required on
the Data Client side are available in the Data Import S57 tab.
To use ENC data protected with the S-63 scheme, you will need to be able to perform the following actions:
Send your user permit written in your dongle together with data request to a Data Server to order
data;
Apply S-63 cell permits to be able to decrypt the data;
Apply Scheme Administrator (SA) certificate to be able to verify data authenticity.

To copy user permit to a file, do the following:

1. Open the Data Import S57 tab and press the Copy user permit button. The Copy S63 User Permit
dialog will open.

Figure 24 Data Import S57 tab

48
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. In the Copy S63 User Permit dialog, select a folder where to save the user permit file and press the
Copy button. The user permit will be saved to a UserPermit.txt file.

Figure 25 Copy S63 User Permit dialog

3. After the user permit is saved to a file, you can send it to a Data Server together with the data request.
The Data Server generates individual data licenses using your user permit data.

To apply S-63 cell permits, do the following:

1. Open the Data Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button. The Apply S63 Cell
Permits dialog will open.
2. In the folder tree, select the folder where the cell permits file is stored. The file name will be displayed in
the pane to the right.

Figure 26 Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog

3. Select the permits file and press the Apply cell permit button. The cell permits written in the permits file
will be applied. You can now decrypt the S-57 data and convert them to the CM93v3 format.
4. In case an error occurred during permits application, the error message will be displayed in the Message
log pane.

49
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To view all installed S-63 cell permits or uninstall a specified cell permit, do the following:
1. Open the Data Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button. The Apply S63 Cell
Permits dialog will open.
2. In the Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog, press the Installed cell permit button. The Installed cell permits
dialog will open. In the dialog window all installed cell permits together with Data Servers who provided
the data and the permits expiration dates are listed.

Figure 27 Installed cell permits dialog

3. To uninstall a permit, select it in the list, press the Delete permit button, and confirm the operation. The
permit will be uninstalled.
4. In case an error occurred during uninstalling permits, the error message will be displayed in the Message
log pane.

50
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To apply a new SA certificate, do the following:
1. Open the Data Import S57 tab and press the Apply SA Certificate button. The Apply SA
Certificate dialog will open.
2. In the folder tree, select the folder where the certificate is stored. The certificate file stored in the selected
folder will be displayed in the pane to the right.

Figure 28 Apply SA Certificate dialog

3. Select the certificate file and press the Apply certificate button. The certificate will be applied and the
message A new SA certificate (public key) has been installed. The certificate is valid to dd.mm.yyyy or
unless the SA issues a new one for security reasons. will appear. In case there was an SA certificate
previously installed, the new certificate will override the previous one.
4. You can restore the previous SA certificate. To do so, press the Restore certificate button and confirm
the operation. The previous certificate will be restored.
5. To view information about the currently installed SA certificate, press the Installed certificate info
button. The Information about installed certificate window will open. The following information on
the current SA certificate is available: the certificate issuing organization (the Issued by field); the
certificate requesting organization (the Issued for field); the certificate validity period (the Valid from
and the Valid till fields). To close the window, press the Close button. :

Figure 29 Information about installed certificate window

6. In case an error occurred during operations with SA certificate, the error message will be displayed in the
Message log pane.

51
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 NOTE:
The check of the validity of the SA signature against each ENC signature is done automatically when the
ENC data are being converted to the CM93v3 format.

4.5.2 Large Media Support

In case S-57 data are provided using large media, you can use the large media support functionality of the
ECDIS to work with the data.

To convert S-57 data to CM93v3 format using large media support, do the following:
1. Insert the large media device to the computer.
2. Open the Data Import S57 tab. Enter a name of the database to be created by S-57 data conversion to
the Database Name field and press the Install Media button. The Install Media window will open.
3. Press the Find Media button to load media information to the system. Available media will be listed in
the Available Media pane. The following information about media is provided: media name, media
contents and media location. Select a media in the list to see additional information and installation
instructions in the Instructions pane.

Figure 30 Install Media window

52
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 NOTE:
To be able to convert a media to the CM93v3 format permits for the media must be installed in the system.

4. To convert a media to the CM93v3 format, select it in the media list and press the Install Media button.
A CM93v3 database with the specified name (see step 2) will be compiled or updated. For details on the
conversion process, see chapter 4.5.3, Import S-57 to CM93v3.
5. To close the Install Media window, press the Close button.

4.5.3 Import S-57 to CM93v3

The ECDIS provides the possibility to import data from the S-57 format to the CM93v3 format. This
function can be accessed from the Data Import S57 tab.

IMPORTANT:

The S-57 Import functional module needs separate licensing. For details on installing licenses see chapter
4.4, Licensing Software Modules.

NOTE:
In case the S-57 data are protected using IHO data protection scheme (S-63), cells permits should be
installed before starting conversion of the data to the CM93v3 format.

S-57 data are available to the users as exchange sets containing datasets, updates, pictures, textual
descriptions, and a catalog file with the description of the exchange set.

To import S-57 data to the CM93v3 data, do the following:

1. Connect the data storage device with the S-57 data to your system and open the Data Import S57 tab.
2. Press the Find databases button. The ECDIS will search for S-57 data on all removable data storage
devices connected to the system. All detected S-57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S-57 source
data pane.

Figure 31 Data Import S57 tab, detected S-57 exchange sets displayed in the S57 source data pane

53
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. In the Database Name field enter the name of the database that will be created during the conversion
process.
4. Select an S-57 exchange set to be converted in the S-57 source data pane and press the Convert button.
The data conversion process will start. The process is performed in two stages:
a. At the first stage, verification of S-57 data is performed. Errors found during the verification
process are recorded to a LOG file. If any critical errors are found, the conversion process is
cancelled. You can turn off the display of error messages. To do so, check the Turn off the errors
report checkbox. To turn the error messages display on, clear the Turn off the errors report
checkbox. If the error messages display is on, the errors found by verification of a next dataset are
displayed in the Errors Report window.

Figure 32 Import S57, Errors Report window

You can do the following:
To continue conversion of the dataset, press the Continue button;
To cancel conversion of the dataset and go on with converting the next dataset and creating
the CM93v3 database, press the Skip button;
To cancel conversion of all datasets altogether and stop creating the CM93v3 database, press
the Stop button.
b. At the second stage S-57 data are converted to datasets of the CM93v3 database. If there is no
database with the name entered to the Database Name field a new CM93v3 database is created
during the conversion process; if there is a database with such name (you can select it from the
Database Names drop-down list) data of this database are overwritten by the new data. At the
termination of the conversion process the message 'Database was created successfully' is displayed.
5. To view the log of all errors occurred during the data conversion, press the Show log button in the Data
Import S57 tab. The S57 conversion error log window will open where you can view all the errors.
6. The new CM93v3 database is saved to a predefined location and is registered in the ECDIS
automatically.

54
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To update a database created by conversion of S-57 data to CM93v3 data, do the following:
1. Connect the data storage device with the S-57 updates data to your system.
2. Open the Data Import S57 tab.
3. Press the Find databases button. The ECDIS will search for S-57 data on all removable data storage
devices connected to the system. All detected S-57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S-57 source
data pane.
4. In the Database Name drop-down list, select the name of the database that will be updated.
5. Select the S-57 exchange set with updates to the database in the S57 source data pane.
6. Press the Convert button. Converted data will be added to the data contained in the specified database.

NOTE:
Databases created by conversion are encrypted for the eToken dongle inserted to your computer at the
moment of conversion. These databases can only be used with this same dongle or a dongle of a dongles
group to which it belongs.

55
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. CHARTS DISPLAY
Chart databases consist of a number of charts. These charts are electronic copies of regular paper charts.
However, working with the electronic charts, you dont have to prepare a next chart and plot the own ship
position on it while working with another chart at the same time, as it happens when working with paper
charts.
Electronic charts are combined into Zones, Areas, and Cells. You can purchase licenses for any set of the
Zones, Areas, and Cells you need.
Depending on the set of Zones, Areas, and Cells, you have a continuous coverage for a geographic area. The
coverage is made up of the electronic charts joining to each other. For example, you have purchased a license
for the English Channel (Zone 1, Area 10). It means you have a continuous coverage for all waters in and
around the English Channel. It looks as if you have a single chart for the whole English Channel and some
part of this chart is displayed on the screen.

Figure 33 Chart coverage for the area of the English Channel (Zone 1, Area 10)
Each Zone, Area, and Cell is made up of a set of electronic charts (copies of paper charts) with different
scales. If you wish, you may switch on the display of borders of the source paper charts. But usually it is not
necessary.

56
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5.1 Moving around the Chart View
The coverage of a geographic area with electronic charts consists of a set of charts that make up one single
chart and some part of this single chart is displayed on the screen like in Figure 34. When moving around the
chart, you are, as it were, moving the chart under the screen.

Figure 34 Electronic chart with a part of it on the screen

To move around the chart, you can use three ways:

Left-click in a position on the chart and the chart will be scrolled so that the position becomes the
center of the screen.
Move the mouse pointer to the upper, lower, left, or right border of the screen: the pointer will
change to a thick black arrow . Left-click to move the screen in the direction of the arrow along
the chart.
The Go to Position function: Open the Chart Chart Settings tab; in the New Center section,
enter coordinates of the point you want to be moved to the center of the screen: the latitude to the
upper field and the longitude to the lower field. Press the Go to Position button: the chart will be
scrolled so that the indicated position becomes the center of the screen.

5.2 Scaling the Chart View

All source paper charts used for creating electronic charts have different compilation scales. The original
scale of an electronic chart is the compilation scale of the paper chart digitized to create the electronic chart.
The scale at which the electronic chart is displayed on the screen usually differs from the original scale and is
called the current view scale. Use the Original Scale option of the Chart Viewing Tools panel to
synchronize the original and the current view scales of the chart if necessary.
The same geographical area can be covered by several charts with different scales. Which chart is displayed
at the moment depends on the current view scale. All charts included in the database are divided into groups
according to their scale called scale levels. The currently displayed chart belongs to the scale level
corresponding to the current view scale. The levels are as follows:

Letter
Scale name Current view scale range
symbol

Background, small scale Z (0) 1:5,000,001 UNLIMITED

Background, medium scale A (1) 1:1,500,001 1:5,000,000

57
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Letter
Scale name Current view scale range
symbol

Overview B (2) 1:500,001 1:1,500,000

General C (3) 1:150,001 1:500,000

Coastal D (4) 1:50,001 1:150,000

Approach E (5) 1:15,001 1:50,000

Harbor F (6) 1:5,001 1:15,000

Berthing G (7) 0 1:5,000

For example, when the current view scale is 1:100 000, charts of the "Coastal" level are displayed. When the
current scale is 1:40 000, charts of the "Approach" level are displayed. The ECDIS application changes
charts in the view automatically when you set a new current view scale corresponding to a different scale
level. Besides that, an alarm may be given at the change of the scale level.
When changing the current view scale of the chart, it may differ from the original chart scale. If the current
view scale is larger than the original chart scale, the view is overscaled; if the current view scale is smaller
than the original chart scale, the view is underscaled. For example, the original chart scale is 1:50 000, and
the current view scale is 1:20 000. The current view scale is within scale range of the Approach (E) scale
level and the chart of this level is displayed. However, the scale of this chart is 1:50 000, which is 2.5 times
as small as the current view scale.
Such situations may be dangerous as you are expecting more detailed information at the set current view
scale, whereas the source paper chart wasnt supposed to have the expected detail level. You may be relying
too much on the chart and get into an accident. The ECDIS has an indicator that informs you about the
underscale or overscale of the current view to avoid accidents.

58
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
There are several methods for changing the chart view scale.

To scale the chart view using the drag-to-zoom method:

1. Press and hold down the left mouse button, while drawing the drag-to-zoom rectangle around the
area you wish to zoom in.
2. Release the mouse button. The area inside the box will be shown in the whole chart window.

Figure 35 Zooming the chart view using the drag-to-zoom method

3. If you want to cancel this operation press the ESC key while drawing.
4. To zoom the chart out do the same holding the SHIFT key down.

NOTE:
In case of zooming out, the whole chart window will shrink to the size of the drag-to-zoom rectangle after
releasing the mouse button.

To scale the chart view using the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel:

Type the scale in the Chart Scale Edit field and press ENTER.

The Zoom In button doubles the current view scale and the Zoom Out button
halves it.
The Original Scale option changes the scale to the original scale of the chart that is currently in the
view .
The Best scale option displays a chart with the largest scale available for the position of the own
ship. The chart is displayed at its original scale .

NOTE:
The Best Scale option is only available if the Navigation mode is on.

59
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To scale the chart view using the mouse wheel:
Turn the mouse wheel forward to increase the current view scale and backward to decrease the current view
scale. This way the current view scale is increased/decreased by 5% with every turn of the wheel.

NOTE:
In case the mouse wheel has no effect, left-click in the chart to return the active focus to the chart view.

5.3 Bookmarks
The current chart view is defined by the position of the screen center, the current scale, and the current chart
display settings. Using the Bookmarks option, you can save the current screen coordinates and chart settings
to a bookmark. When this bookmark is opened later, the displayed chart will be identical.

To use bookmarks, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Settings tab.
2. Enter the name of the bookmark to the bookmark names field in the Bookmarks section.
3. Press the Add button. The bookmark will be saved and added to the bookmarks list.
4. To open a previously saved bookmark, select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop-down list and press
the Go To button. The chart will be scrolled to the center position saved in the bookmark and scaled
accordingly.
5. To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop-down list, press the Delete button,
and confirm the bookmark deletion.

5.4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend

A vector electronic chart is a part of geographic information system. An electronic chart displays data stored
in a geographic database. The database stores records of geographical objects. The objects are defined by a
set of attributes. These are the values of the attributes that define the way the objects are displayed on the
screen.
Besides the attributes defining the appearance and the position of an object on the electronic chart, the set of
attributes of the object may include additional information attributes such as for example the object name,
textual information, picture, and other attributes that are not required to be displayed in the chart.
To get access to this information, use the Object Info function. The function displays attributes of objects in
a separate panel, the Object Info panel. To open the panel, right-click in any position in the chart view. The
Object Info panel will open with a list of all objects that were under the mouse pointer when you right-
clicked in the chart.

60
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
There are different types of objects. They are point, line, and area object types. Hence a position in the chart
can be shared by numerous objects of different types. All objects that share the position where you right-
clicked will be listed in the Object Info panel. If you need information about a particular object, right-click
on the object. The object will be listed in the Object Info panel together with all other objects under the
pointer.

Figure 36 Object Info panel

The Object Info panel consists of two panes: the pane displaying the list of objects and the pane displaying
the attributes of a specified object. To display attributes of an object, select it in the objects list.
The first object in the objects list is the dataset (the electronic chart) that was under the mouse pointer when
the Object Info panel was opened.
Double click on the object in the list to highlight it on the chart. To clear highlighting, press the Clear
highlight button.
If an object symbol is against a yellow background it means that the object has been updated by
means of auto update (RTU).

If an object symbol is against a blue background it means that the object is a mariner object.

61
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
In the Object Info panel you can also open the Chart Legend pane. To do so, press the Chart Legend
button. To close the chart legend and return to the objects list, outpress the Chart Legend button. The Chart
Legend pane provides information about the dataset. Partially this information is the same that you get in the
Attributes pane when you select the dataset in the objects list. However, the chart legend provides additional
information: chart units in the Chart Units section and the current settings of the dataset display in the
Current Display section.

Figure 37 Object Info panel, Chart Legend

5.5 Additional Chart Windows

The ECDIS provides the possibility to use additional chart windows besides the main chart window. The
additional windows are the look-ahead window and the 3D window.

5.5.1 Look-ahead Window

The look-ahead window is a chart view window. You can use it at the same time as the main chart view
window and have two different views of the same area.

To open the look-ahead window, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Settings tab.
2. In the New Window section, press the Chart button. The Look-ahead View will open.
The look-ahead window properties are the same as those of the main window. The properties are set in the
tabs of the Chart panel. The properties are set for the chart window which is currently selected. To select a
chart window, use the Look Ahead and Monitor buttons that appear in the upper right corner of the panel
after you have opened the look-ahead window.
The Chart Scale panel of the Look-ahead View differs from that of the main chart view.
In the Scale field, the chart view scale and the over scale factor are displayed.
The over scale factor shows in how many times the chart view scale is larger or
smaller than the original chart scale.

The Zoom In button doubles the Look-ahead View scale and the Zoom

Out button halves it.

Figure 38 Chart
Scale panel 62
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 In the Scale edit field, the scale of the Look-ahead View is set: enter the scale value and press the
ENTER key. The chart view scale will be changed.
The Original Scale button sets the view scale to the value of the original scale of the chart that is
displayed currently.
The Ship on screen option scrolls the chart so that the own ship was in the view.
The Synchronize button synchronizes the look-ahead view and the main chart view so that the
same geographic area is displayed in both views.

NOTE:
The Synchronize function doesnt work together with the Ship on screen option on.

5.5.2 3D Window
The 3D window displays the chart area that is currently on the screen as a 3-dimensional model.

To open the 3D window, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Settings tab.
2. In the New Window section, press the 3D button. The 3D window will open.

Figure 39 3D Window
The 3D Window can be expanded for a better 3D view and, if required, shown on a separate PC monitor.
To arrange the 3D view, use the 3D window control buttons:

Set view from ship Sets the view from the own ship. This mode is available only if the ship is
inside the chart view (and the 3D window) borders.

Show/hide vertices Displays/hides vertices, the points on which the 3D picture is built.

63
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Show/hide wireframe Displays/hides the lines connecting the 3D picture vertices (see above).

Show/hide colored Z layers When this option is on, all depths are divided into 10 layers from the
minimum depths to the surface. The layers are displayed in different colors. The palette for the
layers presentation is selected in the Z colors panel (see below). When Z layers are hidden all
depths are displayed in blue color (but with different shades).

Show/hide alarm area When this option is on, all depths shallower than the safety contour are
marked with red color.

Show/hide water surface Displays/hides the water surface which is represented as a blue plane.

Show/hide terrain Displays/hides the Terrain profile. When the terrain profile is hidden, the land
area is always displayed flat.

Show/hide seabed Displays/hides the seabed.

Show/hide compass Displays/hides the compass. The compass is represented as a blue and red
arrow in the lower left corner. The blue arrow points to the north and the red arrow points to the
south.

Show/hide navigation Displays/hides aids to navigation.

Show/hide vessel Displays/hides the own ship. The ship's size in the 3D window depends on the
chart scale.

Show/hide ERBL Displays/hides the Electronic Range and Bearing Line in the 3D window.

Depth and coordinate scale frame Displays/hides the frame with the values of the depth,
latitude and longitude coordinate scales.

Zoom in Zooms the 3D view in.

Zoom out Zooms the 3D view out.

64
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Z scale panel. In the Z Scale panel, you can adjust vertical scale for the best presentation of the
surface. The land surface and seabed surface scales are configured separately.

Figure 40 3D Window, Z scale panel

The vertical scale with the value of 1 displayed in the field under the scale control (slider in the
highest position) means that the vertical scale of the 3D view is the same as the chart scale. The
vertical scale with the value of 100 is 100 times as large as the chart scale.

Z colors panel. In the Z colors panel, you can select one of the three palettes for depth layers
presentation. The "Show/hide colored Z layers" option (see above) must be switched on.

Figure 41 3D Window, Z colors panel

65
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Besides the 3D window control buttons, you can arrange the 3D view by zooming it in, zooming it out and
rotating it. To zoom the view in or out, rotate the mouse wheel forward or backward respectively. To rotate
the view in the horizontal plane, hold the left mouse button and move the mouse; to rotate the view in the
vertical plane, hold the right mouse button and move the mouse.
If you change the view of the chart (zoom in, zoom out, or scroll the chart), the 3D view will be changed
automatically.
The 3D window can be closed and resized as a standard MS Windows window.

5.6 Setting up Chart Display

This chapter describes how to configure the chart display. The settings described here configure the chart
appearance and the content displayed in the chart view.
In addition to the chart display settings, there is a set of navigational chart settings. The navigational chart
settings configure the chart display so that it would be more convenient to monitor the own ship navigation.
The navigational settings include chart orientation, true and relative motions modes, best scale mode, and the
display of lights sectors. The settings are described in the chapter 7.5, Navigational Chart Settings.

5.6.1 Chart Presentation Models

There are three chart presentation models available for the presentation of the chart:
C-Map The presentation model is based on the INT1 standard.
S-52 The presentation model is based on the IHO S-52 standard.
S-52 Simplified The S-52 chart presentation model with simplified symbols for buoys and
beacons.
The C-Map presentation model is not based on official standards. If this model is used, in the chart view
there is the 'Non-standard chart presentation is used' notice displayed in the upper left corner.

Figure 42 C-Map presentation Figure 43 S-52 presentation model Figure 44 S-52 Simplified
model presentation model

The C-Map presentation model is used by default.

To set one of the presentation models, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Presentation tab.

66
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 45 Chart Chart Presentation tab, Presentation models
2. In the Presentation section, select one of the presentation models. The selected model will be applied to
the char view immediately.

5.6.2 Display Type

The Display Type option is used to choose the required level of detail to be applied to the chart. The ECDIS
implements four display categories:
Base The Display Base is that part of the Standard Display which should be permanently
retained on the display. It consists of coastline (high water); own ship's safety contour, to be
selected by the mariner; indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety
contour which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour; indication of isolated
dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges, overhead
wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to
navigation; traffic routing systems; scale, range, orientation and display-mode; units of depth and
height. In addition to the objects set, a specified set of chart presentation parameters is used.
Custom Base Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or
removed from the base set of parameters. The last chart presentation parameters settings are saved
in the system.
Standard The Standard Display is on screen when the chart is first displayed by the ECDIS. The
Standard Display is recalled by single operator action: press the Data Display Type indicator
in the Indicators panel. The Standard display consists of Display Base; drying line;
indication of fixed and floating aids to navigation; boundaries of fairways, channels, etc; visual and
radar conspicuous features; prohibited and restricted areas; chart scale boundaries; indication of
cautionary notes. In addition to the objects set, a specified set of chart presentation parameters is
used.
Custom Standard Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or
removed from the standard set of parameters. The last chart presentation parameters settings are
saved in the system.
All other The All Other Display shows the chart information in full., the All Other Display type
has no mandatory chart presentation parameters. The All Other Display is recalled by single
operator action: press the Data Display Type indicator in the Indicators panel.
Custom The Custom Display displays the Display Base and other chart information by class on
demand.

67
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To set one of the display types, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Chart Settings tab.
2. In the Display Type drop-down list, select a display type. Information corresponding to the selected
display type will appear on the screen immediately.
3. The Custom Base display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the Base
Display type. By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings.
4. The Custom Standard display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the
Standard Display or All Other types. By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings.
In the table below the use of chart presentation parameters for the display types is presented:

Presentation parameter Base Display Standard Display

Depth settings

Two shades + +
Safe contour only + +
Isolated dangers in unsafe + +
waters

Shallow pattern + +
Safe depths + +
Plain depth contour + +
Other settings

Plain borders + +
NOAA navaids + +
ENC boundary ++ ++
Chart boundary + +
Overscale id - ++
Scale boundary - +
Lat/Lon grid + +

68
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Presentation parameter Base Display Standard Display

Text settings

National text + +
Aids to navigation tooltip + +

NOTE:

++ the parameter is mandatory for the display type; when the display type is turned on, the parameters
are set automatically; setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the Custom
Base or Custom Standard;
+ the parameter is not mandatory for the display type; when the display type is turned on, the parameter is
not set automatically, but it remains set if it was set before; setting or removing one of the parameters
doesnt change the current display type;
- the parameter is not mandatory for the display type, when the display type is turned on the parameters
are removed automatically; setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the
Custom Base or Custom Standard;
Presentation parameters not mentioned in the table belong to the parameters group marked with -.

69
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To set the Custom Display type, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Chart Settings tab.
2. In the Display Type drop-down list, select the Custom option. The list of
object classes that you can select to be displayed will open.
3. Select the object classes you want to be displayed. To select an object class,
check the checkbox to the left from the object class name. All objects of the
selected object classes will appear on the screen immediately.
4. To save the current configuration of the Custom Display, enter the name of the
configuration to the drop-down list at the bottom of the Display Type section
and press the Save button.
Figure 46 Chart
5. To set one of the previously saved Custom Display configurations, select the Data Display tab,
configuration name in the drop-down list. Custom display type
6. To delete one of the previously saved Custom Display configurations, select
the configuration name in the drop-down list and press the Delete button.
7. You can set your Custom Display the same as the Base, Standard, or All other display types. To do so,
press the Set by button and select the display type you need from the context menu.

5.6.3 Supplementary Data

The Jeppesen chart database includes supplementary data in addition to cartographic data. The
supplementary data can be used in voyage planning and other navigational purposes. The supplementary data
is included in the database as supplementary data layers.
The supplementary data are tides and tide currents, GMDSS areas, SAR regions, improved background and
overview charts, and terrain data. You can choose to display or hide the supplementary data layers on the
chart.

To display/hide the supplementary data of a specified database, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Settings tab. The supplementary data display is configured in the
Supplementary Chart Info section.

Figure 47 Chart Data Display tab, Supplementary Chart Info

2. In the Databases drop-down list, select a database. If the database contains supplementary data layers,
they will be listed in the pane below.
70
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. To display a supplementary layer data, set the checkbox to the left from the section name. The data will
be displayed immediately. To hide a supplementary layer data, clear the checkbox near the data layer
name.

5.6.4 Depth Areas Presentation

Depth areas presentation is configured in the Chart Chart Presentation tab, in the Contours section. In
the section values of three contours are set: the safety contour, the shallow contour, and the deep contour.
The value of the safety depth is also set here. The contours values are used in the ECDIS for distinguishing
on the chart display between the safe and the unsafe water and for generating anti-grounding alarms.

Figure 48 Chart Chart Presentation tab, Contours section

To set the contours values, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Presentation tab.
2. Enter the depth values of the contours to the fields corresponding to the contours:
Safety contour is the depth contour selected by the user that should not be crossed to avoid
grounding the ship. The contour is used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between the safe
and the unsafe water, for generating anti-grounding alarms, and for checking routes.

NOTE:
If a particular electronic chart does not have the depth contour that is set in the Safety Contour field, the
system will automatically set the nearest deeper contour as the Safety Contour. For example, the safety
contour value is set to 15 meters, if there is no a 15 meters contour on the chart but there are 10 and 20
meter contours, the 20 meter contour will be considered the safety contour. In case there are no depth
contours at all in the chart, the ECDIS will give the alarm Safety contour not available.

Safety depth The depth defined by the mariner, e.g. the ship's draft plus under keel clearance, to
be used by the ECDIS to emphasize soundings on the display equal to or less than this value. All
soundings that are deeper than the safety depth will be displayed in a light grey color, while
soundings that are less than or equal to the safety depth will be displayed in black.
Shallow contour The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the
display between medium shallow and very shallow waters. Medium shallow water area lies between
the safety contour and the shallow contour, and very shallow water area lies between the shallow
contour and the zero meter contour.

71
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 The shallow contour value should be less than that of the safety contour. The shallow contour value
is not used in other ECDIS functions.
Deep contour The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the
display between medium deep and deep waters. Medium deep water area lies between the deep and
safety contours and the deep water area is all water deeper than the deep contour. The deep contour
The deep contour value is not used in other ECDIS functions.
3. To apply the Contour settings, press the Set Parameters button.

NOTE:
There is a possibility that the chart has depth contours in it, but the ECDIS doesnt recognize them. It
happens because the ECDIS only recognizes contours if they bound depth areas. In case you have doubts,
open the Object Info panel where you can see the depth contour objects and check if they bound depth areas
or not (see chapter 5.4, Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend).

The contours values are used to distinguish on the display between depth areas that are safe or unsafe for
navigation. The areas are filled with colors specified in standards. The colors are as follows:

Depth Range Color

No. From To C-Map Presentation S-52 Presentation

1 Zero-depth contour Shallow contour Dark blue Dark blue

2 Shallow contour Safety contour Blue Blue

3 Safety contour Deep contour Light blue Green grey

4 Deep contour Unknown White Light green grey

NOTE:
The contours values are used to highlight four depth areas. To limit the highlighted areas to only two areas,
set the Two shades property in the Chart Chart Presentation Depth settings tab. In this case, safe and
unsafe waters are distinguished on the display.

5.6.5 Depth Settings

Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data. The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the
overloading. One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view. Chart elements that can be
displayed selectively are divided into four groups: depth elements, text elements, light sectors, and other
elements.

To display or hide elements from the Depth settings group, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Chart Presentation Depth settings tab. In the tab, there is a list of depth
elements.

72
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 49 Chart Chart Presentation Depth settings tab
2. To display an element in the chart view, set the checkbox to the left from the element name; to hide the
element from the chart view, clear the checkbox. There are the following chart elements in the Depth
settings tab:
Two shades Only two depth areas are to be highlighted in the chart view: safe and unsafe water
areas. The safe water area is separated from the unsafe water area with the safety contour set in the
Contours section of the Chart Chart Presentation tab.
Shallow pattern The depth are from the coast line to the safety contour is filled with a dedicated
pattern.
Safe contour only Turns off the display of all depth contours except for the safety contour. Used
for hiding depth contours, especially in areas with complex relief, to reduce cluttering.
Safe depths Turns on the display of soundings which are deeper than the safety depth set in the
Contours section of the Chart Chart Presentation tab. In S-52 presentation, unsafe soundings
are black, and safe soundings are grey. In C-Map presentation, there is no difference in appearance
of the safe and unsafe soundings.
Isolated dangers in unsafe waters Isolated dangers in unsafe waters are marked with a dedicated

hazard symbol .
Plain depth contour Turns off the display of depth contours labels.
3. The settings take effect immediately after they have been set.

73
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5.6.6 Text Settings
Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data. The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the
overloading. One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view. Chart elements that can be
displayed selectively are divided into four groups: depth elements, text elements, light sectors, and other
elements.

To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Chart Presentation Text settings tab. In the tab, there is a list of chart text
elements.

Figure 50 Chart Chart Presentation Text settings tab

2. To display an element in the chart view, set the checkbox to the left from the element name; to hide the
element from the chart view, clear the checkbox. There are the following elements in the Text settings
tab:
Light info Turns on the display of characteristics of lights. The information of a light is displayed
next to the light symbol. If the setting is off, the information about a light can only be obtained from
the Object Info panel.
Periodic date Turns on the display of objects with a periodic date of activity only during their
activity period. If the setting is off, the objects with periodic date of activity are always displayed on
the chart.
Text (important) Turns on the display of texts that have the important category. These texts
contain the information important for navigation such as bridge clearance, depth values above point
obstructions, etc.
Text (generic) Turns on the display of texts that have the generic category. These texts are
names of geographic objects such as countries, cities, islands, etc.
Text (other) Turns on the display of texts that have the other category. These texts are names of
lights and other aids to navigation.
Aids to navigation tooltip Turns on the display of tooltips with information about aids to
navigation. The tooltips appear when the mouse pointer is over an aids to navigation object.
National text Turns on the display of object names in national languages in the chart if available.
The setting only works for the C-Map presentation.
Mariners notes Turns on the display of mariner's notes (see chapter 6.3, Mariner Objects).

74
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. The settings take effect immediately after they have been set.

5.6.7 Other Settings

Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data. The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the
overloading. One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view. Chart elements that can be
displayed selectively are divided into four groups: depth elements, text elements, light sectors, and other
elements.

To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Chart Presentation Other settings tab. In the tab, there is a list of chart
elements.

Figure 51 Chart Chart Presentation Other settings tab

2. To display an element in the chart view, set the checkbox to the left from the element name; to hide the
element from the chart view, clear the checkbox. There are the following elements in the Other settings
tab:
Plain borders Turns on the display of borders of various special areas (caution areas, deep water
areas, etc.) as plain dashed lines. The setting only works for the S-52 presentation.
INFORM symbol Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the
Information attribute.
Quality symbol Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating the quality of the electronic
chart. The setting only works for the All Other display type.
The quality symbols correspond to so-called zones of confidence. There are six categories of the
confidence zones. The categories are defined by the quality of survey, in particular by the positional
accuracy, the depth accuracy, the seafloor coverage and typical survey characteristics. The
categories are the following (in brackets the position accuracy is given as an example): A1 (5m), A2
(20m), B (50m), C (500m), D (worse than 500m) and U (data not assessed).
For the S-52 presentation, the quality symbol looks as an ellipse with a u letter
inside if the data are not assessed, or as a triangle with the zone of confidence mark
inside for other zones.
For the C-Map presentation zones of confidence are indicated with a dashed line.

75
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To find out the category of the zone of confidence, open the Object Info panel with a right-click in
the chart view and select the Quality of Data object in the objects list. Check the Category of zone
of confidence in data attribute in the Attributes pane to the right.
Picture symbol Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the
Pictorial representation attribute.
Low accuracy ind. Turns on display of special symbols indicating that the position of
an object is defined with low accuracy (the QUAPOS attribute of the object is set to any
other value than surveyed). The property is relevant for the following objects: point
land areas, point and area wrecks, and point and area obstructions.
Text descr. symbol Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating objects with the
Textual description attribute (the description may contain for example an extraction from
a pilot book).
NOAA Navaids Turns on the display of symbols of Aids to Navigation created using the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (USA) standards, rather than the INT1 standard. The
setting only works for the C-Map presentation.
Overscale id Applies a dedicated vertical pattern to the chart or the part of it that is over-scaled
(the chart display sale is twice more than the original scale of the chart).
ENC boundary Turns on the display of borders of the ENC coverage.
Scale boundary Turns on the display of borders of areas covered with charts of different scale
levels.
Chart boundary Turns on the display of chart borders.
Lat/Lon grid Turns on the display of the Lon / Lat grid.
Use SCAMIN Turns on the use of the SCAMIN (minimum scale) attribute of objects. If the
setting is on, objects with the SCAMIN attribute are removed from the chart view once the chart
view scale is less than the minimum scale of the object display.
3. The settings take effect immediately after they have been set.

76
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5.7 Printing Chart
The ECDIS provides the possibility to print the chart currently displayed on the screen out.

To print out the chart, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Settings tab and press the Print Chart button. The Print preview window
will open.
2. To renew the chart image to be printed, press the Renew Preview button. The preview image will
display the most recent changes in the chart view.
3. To configure the properties of the print out, pres the Printer Setup button. The standard Print Setup
window will open where you can configure the print properties.
4. To print the chart out, press the Print button. The chart image displayed in the Print preview window
will be printed out.

Figure 52 Print preview window

77
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6. VOYAGE PREPARATION
6.1 Charts Catalogue
The Chart Catalogue allows you to obtain detailed information about charts belonging to a specified
database.
Using the Chart Catalogue function, you can find any chart of a specified database you are particularly
interested in and view it in the chart view. You can also display boundaries of charts grouped into scale
levels in the chart view.

6.1.1 Searching Charts Catalogue

In the Charts Catalogue, you can obtain information about any particular chart and view the chart on the
screen.

To search the chart catalogue, do the following:

1. Open the Data Chart Catalogue tab.

Figure 53 Data Chart Catalogue tab

2. Select a database in the databases drop-down list. The list of charts grouped by issuing organizations will
be displayed in the pane under the databases drop-down list.
3. To expand a group, click on the plus + sign next to the group name. In the expanded list, names of
charts will be presented. To collapse the group, click on the minus - sign next to the group name.
4. Select a chart to view information about it in the pane to the right from the charts list. To scroll the chart
view so that to display a specified chart, double-click on the chart name in the charts list.

78
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 54 Data Chart Catalogue tab, chart information pane
5. To use the Find option for searching charts, enter the name of the source paper chart to the Find field.
As you are entering the name symbols, charts which have the symbols you are entering in their names
will be selected in the catalogue. Keep entering the chart name symbols until you find the right chart.

6.1.2 Viewing Chart Boundaries by Scale Levels

All charts in the Jeppesen chart database are divided into groups according to their scales and intended
usage. The groups are called scale levels (see chapter 5.2, Scaling the Chart View). Using the Chart
Catalogue function, you can display boundaries of charts in the chart view by scale levels.

To display chart boundaries by scale levels, do the following:

1. Open the Data Chat Catalogue tab.
2. Select a database in the databases drop-down list.
3. In the Chart Boundaries section, check checkboxes next to the scale level names and press the Apply
button. Boundaries of charts assigned to the selected scale levels will be displayed in the chart view.
4. Use the Mark All button to mark all the scale levels, and the Clear All button, to unmark all the scale
levels.

79
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 55 Data Chart Catalogue tab, boundaries of coastal and coastal/approach charts

80
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.2 Correcting the Chart
The first step in preparing the voyage is making sure that your charts have all the latest updates applied to
them. You need to correct all applicable charts through the latest Notice to Mariners, Local Notice to
Mariners, and Broadcast Notice to Mariners, and ensure charts to be used are the correct edition.
The ECDIS provides two methods for correcting charts: automatic updating and manual updating.

6.2.1 Automatic Updating

Using the Automatic Updating function, you can automatically log on to the Jeppesen Update Server over
the Internet and download updates for the currently installed database. An updates log of all chart corrections
is maintained. The Automatic Updating requires the system to be logged on to the Internet over any
communication channel.

To download chart updates over the Internet and to automatically register them, do the following:
1. Open the Data Auto Updating tab and press the Auto Updating button. The Auto Updating pane
will open.

Figure 56 Data Auto Updating tab, Automatic Updating function

2. Select the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop-down
list. If only one database is in view, the Databases drop-down list is not displayed in the Data Auto
Updating tab.
3. Press the Download updates button to start downloading updates. You can monitor the downloading
process in the Processing field. All steps of the process are shown in the Processing drop-down list.
4. To check the size of available updates before downloading, press the Get size button. The updates size
will be displayed in the Processing field.

NOTE:
The updating service is a fully automatic service provided by Jeppesen and replies are sent within 10
minutes, unless there is some delay, over your email provider.

5. After updates have been received, they are automatically registered in the database. To see which
datasets have been updated and to access the list of updates, use the Updating Log and Review Updates
functions.

81
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.2.2 Semi-automatic Updating
Semi-automatic updating is an alternative to the fully automatic updating. When using the Semi Auto
Updating function, you should create and save a request for updates, send it to the updates server by email,
receive the updates by e-mail as well and apply them to the database manually.

To download chart updates by e-mail and to register them manually, do the following:
1. Open the Data Auto Updating tab and press the SemiAuto Updating button. The SemiAuto
Updating pane will open.

Figure 57 Data Auto Updating tab, Semi Auto Updating function

2. Select the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop-down
list. If only one database is in view, the Databases drop-down list is not displayed in the Data Auto
Updating tab.
3. Set the maximum return email size: select an option from the Maximum return email size drop-down
list. The option should be used if there is a limitation on the email attachment size from your email
provider, or the answer file needs to be stored on a floppy disk. Check with your email provider and set
the required size. The updating server will then divide the replies into several emails in order to comply
with these limitations.
4. Save the updates order: in the folders tree in the left-hand pane, select a directory to which the order file
will be saved and press the Save order button. Confirm the operation. The order file will be saved in the
specified directory.
5. Send the order file as an attachment to [email protected]. It is very important that you send the new
order file to the updates server and not the same file as before as this will result in duplicate update being
received.
6. After a short period of time, you will receive the answer from the Updates Server with updates attached
to it. Save the update files to a data storage device and connect the device to the system.
7. To install updates, select the folder where the updates files are stored in the folders tree and press the Get
updates from directory button. The updates will be extracted from files and registered in the database.

82
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.2.3 Updating Log/Review Updates
During the updating process, the updates log is kept where the list of updated datasets is recorded, as well as
the list of all changed objects. In the list of changed objects, objects are grouped by hydrographic
organizations that issued the updates, by datasets to which the updates were applied, and by numbers of files
in which the updates are stored. You can view the both lists in the Data Auto Updating Updating
Log/Review Updates pane.

To view the list of updated charts and a complete list of updated objects, do the following:
1. Open the Data Auto Updating tab and press the Updating Log/Review Updates button. The
Updating Log and Review Updates panes will open.

Figure 58 Data Auto Updating tab, Updates Log and Updates Review
2. The Updates Log pane displays all charts (datasets) to which updates have been applied. The
information relating to each dataset includes: dataset name (the Name column), update status accepted
or declined (the Status column), the number of updates applied to the dataset (the Number column) and
the date when the updates were applied (the Date column).
3. When the updates are imported from the S-57 format, the import log is kept. In case there were any
problems during the import process, the log file can be viewed: the Remark button becomes active, and
to view the log, just press it. In case there were no problems during the import process, the import log is
unavailable, and the Remark button remains dimmed.
4. The Updates Review list on the right part of the pane is made up of records of the updates sorted by the
updates issuing hydrographic offices; by datasets to which the updates were applied, and by numbers of
files in which the updates are stored. The tool tips should assist you in viewing long names and remarks.
Information about each correction is given in a short form. For example, it does not contain the past and
present cartographic object position but it is just written as Modified.
5. Double click on any correction in order to highlight it on the chart. The screen will be panned to the
object position and the scale changed to the original scale of the source chart. A small arrow will point to
the object that has been modified. To clear the highlight, press either the Clear Highlight button right
above the updates list or the Clear Highlight button in the upper right corner of the Data panel.

NOTE:
When a new database issue is installed, updates that have been included in the new issue of the database as
regular objects will be automatically removed from the hard disk.

83
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.2.4 Manual Updating
The Manual Updating function allows you to apply updates to the chart data manually. The main source for
updates is Notice to Mariners. The updates included in the Notices to Mariners are normally included in the
set of automatic updates. However, information about changes in the charts is published in the periods
between the issues of Notices to Mariners through various channels. The channels include NAVTEX,
NAVAREA, and other navigational communications and warnings.
Using the Manual Updating, you can apply the changes reported by official navigational organizations but
not issued as Notices to Mariners yet.
Using the Manual Updates function, you can add new objects to the chart data, edit and delete existing
objects.
Manual updates are registered in a separate chart layer that is not connected with existing charts: it is an
independent dataset called Extrascale dataset. When the chart is prepared to be displayed in the chart view, it
is overlaid with data from the Extrascale dataset. However, if you, when adding objects, indicate that they
are included in the Notices to Mariners, the changes are applied to the chart dataset which is currently
displayed in the chart view. The changes are applied to the chart dataset if the existing dataset objects are
edited.
Objects edited or added with Manual Updating are displayed in the chart view as regular
cartographic objects with a special symbol. All changes made by the Manual Updating
function are registered in the manual updating log. The log is displayed in the Manual Update tab in the
Updates History pane where you can view all the updates modification and reject any of them.

To view manual updates history, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Manual Update tab.
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database. In the History pane below, the history of manual
updates applied to the specified database will be displayed. The manual updates history is presented as a
tree structure where the first level is the dataset to which the updates were entered, the second level is the
updated object, and the third level is the list of actions applied to the object.

Figure 59 Chart Manual Update tab, manual updates history

84
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. To expand the list of objects click on the plus + sign next to the dataset name. To collapse the list of
objects, click on the minus - sign next to the dataset name.
4. To expand the list of actions performed with an object, click on the plus + sign next to the object name.
To collapse the list of actions, click on the minus sign next to the object name.
5. To view detailed information about entries of the manual updates history tree, select the entry. The
information will be displayed in the pane to the right from the History pane.
6. To hide a manual update object, select its entry in the updates history tree and press the Removed from
display button. The object is hidden and the Removed from display button remains pressed. To display
the object again, select it in the history tree and outpress the Removed from display button.
7. To highlight the updated object in the chart view, double-click on one of the actions that have been
performed with the object or select the action in the actions list and press the Highlight button. The
ECDIS will highlight the object in the position and the state where it was plotted after the selected action.
To cleat the highlight, press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart panel.
8. To reject an update, select the updated object in the objects list, press the Reject button, and confirm the
operation. The object will return to its state before the update.
9. You can reject all updates applied to a dataset. To do so, select the dataset in the datasets list, press the
Reject button, and confirm the operation. All updates objects of the dataset will return to their initial
states. If you reject all updates applied to the Extrascale dataset, the dataset will be deleted.

NOTE:
You cant reject a single action only all actions performed with an object or all the objects updated in a
dataset.

To add a manual update to the chart, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Manual Update tab.
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database to which you want to add a manual update.
3. Press the Add New button. The Add New Object dialog will open.

Figure 60 Chart Manual Update tab, Add New Object dialog

85
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. Select an object from the objects list. To find an object, use the Search function: enter the name of the
object to the Search field and press the Find button.
5. Geographic objects can have various geometry types. After selecting the object, set the object geometry
type. Select a Point, Line or Area option. The geometry types that are not available for the specified
object remain dimmed.
6. Clear the From Notice to Mariner checkbox if it is set and press the OK button. Adding manual
updates from notices to mariners is described below. The Attributes pane will open where you can set
the values of the new object attributes.

Figure 61 Chart Manual Update tab, adding new object, editing attributes
7. To set an attribute value, select the attribute in the attributes list and enter the value to the Value field (or
select it from the drop-down list if available).
8. Set the object coordinates: either plot the object in the chart view using the mouse pointer or set the
object coordinates in the Metrics pane. To open the Metrics pane, press the Metrics button. To return to
the Attributes pane, outpress the Metrics button.

Figure 62 Chart Manual Update tab, adding new object, editing metrics

86
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
9. Plotting the object in the chart view:
To plot a node, left-click in the chart view. To add a next node, left-click in the chart view once
more.
To add a node between two nodes, move the pointer to the position on the line connecting the two
nodes where you want to add a node; left-click in this position: the new node will be created and it
will be attached to the pointer so that it will move with it; to plot the node left-click in the chart
view once more.
To move a node, left-click on it to capture it with the mouse pointer, move the pointer with the node
to a new position, and left-click.
To delete a node, right-click on it. To delete a point object while still in the add object mode, just
cancel the operation: press the Cancel button.
10. After the object attributes and metrics have been set, press the Save button to save the object or the
Cancel button to cancel the operation.
11. The Updated by dialog will open. Enter your name to the field it is the name of the author of the
update. Press the OK button. The object will be displayed in the chart and added to the Manual Update
History list, the Added action will be added to the object actions list.

NOTE:
The new object is added to the Extrascale dataset.

To add a manual update to the chart from a Notice to Mariners, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Manual Update tab.
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database to which you want to add a manual update.
3. Press the Add New button. The Add New Object dialog will open.

Figure 63 Chart Manual Update tab, Add New Object dialog

4. Select an object from the objects list. To find an object, use the Search function: enter the name of the
object to the Search field and press the Find button.
5. After selecting the object, set the object geometry type. Select a Point, Line or Area option. The
geometry types that are not available for the specified object remain dimmed.

87
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6. Set the From Notice to Mariner checkbox and press the OK button. The Add New Object from Notice
to Mariner dialog will open.

Figure 64 Add New Object from Notice to Mariner dialog

7. Select the database from the Databases drop-down list.
8. Enter the number of the Notice to Mariners to the Notice field.
9. Select the code of the data producing agency in the Source Producing Agency drop-down list (the name
of the agency will be automatically displayed in the field to the right).
10. Select the name of the chart to which the object will be added in the Source Identification Code drop-
down list (to view the selected chart, press the Show button). Press the OK button to continue the
operation or the Cancel button to cancel the operation.
11. If you press the OK button, the chart view is scrolled so that to display the specified chart and the
Attributes pane opens.
12. To set the object attributes and metrics, repeat steps 7 to 11 of the previous procedure.

NOTE:
If you add a manual update object from a Notice to Mariners, the object is added to the chart dataset
specified in the Source Identification Code field of the Add New Object from Notice to Mariners dialog.

To edit a manual update object, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Manual Update tab.
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database. In the History pane the list of updates applied to the
specified database will be displayed.
3. Find the updated object you want to edit in the list. To select the object, double-click on the last action
performed with the object or select the last action and press the Highlight button. The object will be
selected and you can start editing it.
4. To edit the object attributes, press the Attributes Edit button. The Attributes pane will open where you
can edit the object attributes. After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them. Enter
your name to the Updated by window and press OK. The object appearance will change to reflect the
attributes changes and the Modified action will be added to the object actions list.

88
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. To edit the object metrics, press the Metrics Edit button. The Metrics pane will open where you can edit
the object metrics. The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table.
After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them. Enter your name to the Updated
by window and press OK. The object will be moved to the new position and the Moved action
will be added to the object actions list.
6. To delete an object, select it and press the Delete button. Enter your name to the Updated by window
and press OK. The object will marked as deleted in the chart view and the Deleted action
will be added to the object actions list.

NOTE:
There are chart objects that can be created using manual updating, but cannot be edited or deleted. The
objects are: Unsurveyed area, Pontoon, Hulk, Floating dock, Dredged area, Depth area, Land area (line,
area).

To edit a chart object, do the following:

1. Select the object in the chart view. Right-click on the object to open the Object Info panel, find the
object entry in the objects list, and double-click on the entry to highlight it in the chart view.
2. Open the Chart Manual Update tab.
3. To edit the object attributes, press the Attributes Edit button. The Attributes pane will open where you
can edit the object attributes. After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them. Enter
your name to the Updated by window and press OK. The dataset to which the edited object belongs will
be added to the datasets list if it is not there, the object appearance will change to reflect the attributes
changes and the Modified action will be added to the object actions list.
4. To edit the object metrics, press the Metrics Edit button. The Metrics pane will open where you can edit
the object metrics. The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table.
After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them. Enter your name to the Updated
by window and press OK. The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets
list if it is not there, the object will be moved to the new position, the object symbol in the previous
position will be crossed with a red line, and the Moved action will be added to the object
actions list.
5. To delete the object, press the Delete button. Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK.
The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there, the
object will marked as deleted in the chart view and the Deleted action will be added to the
object actions list.

NOTE:
If you edit a manual update object, all changes are done in the Extrascale dataset. If you edit a chart object,
all changes are done in the chart dataset.

89
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.3 Mariner Objects
Mariner Objects is a tool developed for the mariners to be able to plot their own notes and marks to the chart.
Mariner objects are entered to an independent chart layer. Thus, they do not affect other ECDIS functionality
and are used exclusively to display mariner's notes. There are seven types of mariner objects available in the
ECDIS.

Mariner objects are the following:

Clearing line a line object: a straight line, drawn through leading marks. A ship moving along
such line will clear certain dangers or remain in the best channel. The line can be drawn though one
or two marks. There are three categories of clearing lines available: Not more than (NMT), Not less
than (NLT), and Not defined.
If the category of the clearing line is NMT, the bearing from the own ship to the mark should
always remain less or equal to the bearing of the clearing line for the ship to clear the danger. If the
category is NLT, the bearing from the own ship should always remain more or equal to the bearing
of the clearing line. The Not defined category is used if the clearing line is drawn through two
marks and the own ship location control is carried out using the range line between the two marks,
rather than the bearing to one of the marks.
Danger highlight a point or area object highlighting a danger.
Event a point object indicating the position of the own ship at the moment of some event.
Mariners feature a point, line, or area object used to highlight an area on the chart that should
attract attention of the mariner because of some effect it can have on navigating across it.
Mariners Note a point object presenting textual information from the mariner related to certain
coordinates. Depending on the importance of the information, you can set two categories of the
Mariners note: information for general information or an unimportant note and caution for
important information, danger, instructions, or orders.
Manufacturers feature a feature or information added by the manufacturer of the ECDlS.
Examples are a caution or information symbol for cursor picking to read out the information on the
alphanumeric display; additional chart information not available in the ENC; manufacturers' value-
added feature; etc.
Position a point object indicating the own ship position fix. The position fix can be calculated or
received from various positioning devices.
Tidal stream or current vector a point object indicating a predicted or actual tidal stream or
current vector with effective time and strength.

90
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
In the table below, geometry types, attribute sets, and categories of mariners objects are described.

Geometry Type and Presentation

Object Attributes Category
point line area

Information
Scale maximum undefined
Clearing line Scale minimum NMT (not more than)
Category of NLT (not less than)
clearing line

Information
Danger
Scale maximum no
highlight
+ Scale minimum

Information
Object name
Scale maximum
Event no
Scale minimum
Local time
Users remark

Information
Object name
Mariner's Scale maximum
no
feature Scale minimum
Local time
User's remark

Information
Scale maximum
Scale minimum undefined
Mariners note Category of information
mariner's note caution
Local time
User's remark

91
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Object Geometry Type and Presentation Attributes Category

Information
Object name
Manufacturer's Scale maximum
no
feature Scale minimum
Local time
User's remark

undefined, dead
reckoning, estimated,
Scale minimum visual, astronomical,
Input identifier Radar, Decca, GPS,
Glonass,
Position Local time Loran/Tchaika,
Position finding MFDF, Omega,
method Transit/Tsikada, dGPS,
dGlonass, dOmega,
dLoran, dDecca

Orientation
Scale minimum
undefined
Tidal stream or Category of current
predicted
current vector and tidal stream
actual
Current strength
Local time

92
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.3.1 Creating and Editing Mariner Objects

To create a mariner object, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Mariner Objects tab and press the Create New button. The Select an Object dialog
will open.

Figure 65 Chart Mariner Objects tab

2. In the Select an Object dialog, select an object type and press the OK button. The ECDIS will switch to
the mariner object edit mode and the object editing tab will open

Figure 66 Chart Mariner Objects tab, Select an Object dialog

3. In the object editing tab, select the object geometry type. To do so, check one of available options for the
geometry type.

Figure 67 Chart Mariner Objects tab, Danger highlight object editing tab

93
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. Fill in the values of attributes. A mariner object can have one or several of the following attributes:
Information information about the object, is not displayed in the chart view;
Scale maximum the maximum scale at which the object starts to be displayed in the chart view;
Scale minimum the minimum scale at which the object is displayed in the chart view; if the
attribute is not set, the object is displayed at all scales;
Category category of the object; often defines the object appearance;
Object name the name or the number of the object;
Local time time of the observation; clear the checkbox in the Local time field and the attribute
will be ignored;
User's remark information related to the object and entered by the user;
Input identifier name or initials of the object author;
Position finding method for Position only select method of the position determination from the
drop-down list;
Orientation for currents only direction of the current in degrees;
Current strength fro currents only speed of the current in knots.
5. Plot the object in the chart view:
Point object move the mouse pointer to the chart view and left-click in the selected position to
plot the object. To move the object, left-click in a different position: the object will be moved to the
new position. You can also drag the object to a different position. To do so, left-click on the object
to capture it with the mouse pointer, drag the object to a new position, and left-click once more to
plot the object there.
Line object move the mouse pointer to the chart view and plot the line nodes using the left mouse
button. You can perform the following operations with the nodes:
To add a new node, left-click in a selected position: the node will be plotted in the chart view.
To move a node, left-click on the node to capture it, move the mouse pointer with the node
to a new position, and left-click to plot the note.
To delete a node, right-click on it.
To insert an intermediate node, left-click on the line between two nodes: the new node is
created in the position of the pointer. The node is attached to the pointer and you can move it.
Move the node to its position and left-click to plot it in the chart view.
To add a node in the beginning or in the end of the line when you plot a line object adding
nodes one after another, the mouse pointer and the last node are linked with a line marker that
indicates the length and position of the next line section. To add a node to one of the line
edges, move the mouse pointer to the edge node, the marker line will connect the pointer and
the node now you can plot new nodes.
Area object to plot an area object, plot the object nodes in the chart view. Nodes of area objects
should be edited in the same way as nodes of line objects.
6. To save the new mariner object, press the Save button. The object will be added to the objects list. To
cancel the object creation, outpress the Edit button and say no to saving the object.

94
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To edit a mariner object, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Mariner Objects tab and select an object in the objects list. You can also select the
object directly in the chart view: make sure that the Chart Mariner Objects tab is open, find the
object in the chart view, and right-click on it. The object will be highlighted and marked with an arrow
symbol. To clear the highlight, press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart
panel.
2. Press the Edit button to switch to the mariner objects edit mode and to open the object editing tab.
3. Change the object attributes and position using the same operations as when creating an object (see
above).
4. To save the changes, press the Save button. To cancel changes, outpress the Edit button and say no to
saving the changes.
5. To hide an object, select its entry in the objects list and press the Removed from display button. The
object is hidden and the Removed from display button remains pressed. To display the object again,
select it in the objects list and outpress the Removed from display button.
6. To delete an object, select it, press the Delete button and confirm the operation.
7. To delete all objects, press the Delete All button and confirm the operation.

6.3.2 Export/Import of Mariner Objects

Mariner objects are mainly intended for the use of the mariner. However, they can be exported to an external
file that can be used for various purposes. Exported objects are written to a file with the DAT extension.
Mariner objects can also be imported to the ECDIS.

To export a mariner object, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Mariner Objects tab and press the Export/Import button to switch to the
export/import mode.

Figure 68 Chart Mariner Objects tab, export/import mode

2. Create the list of objects to export: add mariner objects from the objects list to the Selected Objects list.
Use the selection buttons:

Add Object adds a selected object to the Selected Objects list; Add All Objects
adds all mariner objects to the Selected Objects list;

95
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Remove Object removes a selected object from the Selected Objects list; Remove
All Objects removes all objects from the Selected Objects list;

Select Visible adds mariner objects that are currently displayed in the chart
view to the Selected Objects list, all previously added objects are removed from the Selected
Objects list.

Select Last Imported adds last imported mariner objects to the Selected
Objects list.
3. Press the Export button. The Export mariner objects dialog will open.
4. In the Export mariner objects dialog, indicate the folder where the file will be saved, change the file
name is necessary (default file name is mariner_objects.dat), and press the Export button.
Objects file will be saved in the specified folder.
5. To return to the editor, press the Editor button.

To import a mariner object, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Mariner Objects tab and press the Export/Import button to switch to the
export/import mode.
2. Press the Import button. The Import mariner objects dialog will open.
3. In the Import mariner objects dialog, select the folder where mariner objects files are stored. The list of
files will be displayed in the right-hand pane of the dialog window.
4. Select the mariner objects file to import to the ECDIS and press the Import button.
5. The mariner objects from the file will be imported to the ECDIS and added to the list of other mariner
objects.
6. To return to the editor, press the Editor button.

96
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.4 Route Planning and Plotting

6.4.1 Automatic Route Planning

The ECDIS provides the possibility to automatically plan and plot the route. The route is calculated using the
database of pre-planned routes connecting a number of ports of the world.

To plot a route automatically, do the following:

1. Open the Route Route Finder tab.

Figure 69 Route Route finder tab

2. Add waypoints of the route to the waypoints list in the Itinerary tab. There are two ways of adding
waypoints:
a. add ports from the ports list to the itinerary (see the description of the procedure below);
b. add waypoints by selecting them directly in the chart view (see the description of the procedure
below).
3. Edit the waypoints list (see the description of the procedure below).
4. Calculate the route (see the description of the procedure below).
5. Apply restrictions to the route calculation in case the calculated route leads through narrows, channels or
straits you do not want it to. There are two ways of applying restrictions:
a. forbid using channels and straits for route calculation by indicating it in the Disabled Passages list
(see the description of the procedure below);
b. apply restrictions directly in the chart view (see the description of the procedure below).
6. Recalculate if necessary and save the route (see the description of the procedure below).

97
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To add a port from the ports list to the waypoints list, do the following:
1. Find the port in the ports list. Ports are sorted by port name or by country where ports are located,
depending on the option selected in the Sorted drop-down list below the ports list. Ports that service
vessels with a draft less than the current draft specified for the own ship are disabled in the list and you
cannot select them for your route.
2. Select the port in the ports list (if the Highlight checkbox is ticked, the port will be marked with a green
circle on the chart) and press the Add to Itinerary button. The port will be added to the waypoints list.
3. To find a port in the ports list quickly, you can use the Search function. Switch on the search by port
(select By Port option in the Search Options drop-down list) and type the port name into the Search
field. The first port found that begins with the typed symbols will be highlighted in the list. Continue
typing until required port is highlighted.
4. If the By Country search option is selected, the search is carried out by country. Enter the country name
to the Search field and the first port (alphabetically) of the country will be highlighted. When using the
search by country, sorting by country is also recommended.

5. To scroll the chart view to a port, select the port in the list and press the Go to Position button.
6. To highlight all ports included in the ports list, check the Highlight All checkbox. All ports will be
marked with yellow circles in the chart view.

To add a waypoint to the waypoints list, do the following:

1. Press the Add Waypoints button in the Itinerary tab.

2. Move the mouse pointer to the waypoint position in the chart view and left-click holding down the
SHIFT key. The waypoint will be plotted on the chart as a violet circle and added to the itinerary.
3. Outpress the Add Waypoints button.

To edit the waypoints list, do the following:

1. To remove a port/waypoint from the list, select the port/waypoint and press the Remove button.

2. To move a port/waypoint down or up in the list, select the port/waypoint and press the Move up or
Move down button.

3. To clear the list (remove all ports/waypoints), press the Clear All button.

4. When the Highlight Ports option is checked, all ports in the list are displayed on the
chart as white circles and the port selected in the list is shown as a violet circle.
5. To change the screen position so that the port selected in the list were in the screen center, press the Go
to button. It will also be marked with an arrow.

98
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To calculate the route, do the following:
1. Add all ports and waypoints you want to include in the route, edit the ports/waypoints list, and press the
Calculate button.
2. The ECDIS will calculate the shortest route of all routes available by taking into account your current
draft. The calculated route will be marked on the chart as a yellow line.

To add restrictions to the route calculation by disabling passages, do the following:

1. Open the Disabled passages tab and check the passages you want to close for route calculation.

Figure 70 Route Route Finder tab, Disabled Passages tab

2. In order to allow or forbid sailing through all passages use Mark All and Clear All buttons.
3. To allow using inshore traffic zones for route calculation, check the Inshore traffic allowed checkbox.
The route can be calculated outside Traffic Separation Schemes but can be shorter.
4. To allow using rivers for route calculation, check the Use rivers checkbox.
5. If the Highlight checkbox is ticked the passage will be marked on chart when selected.

6. To scroll the screen to the selected passage, press the Go to Position button. The passage will also
be marked with an arrow symbol.
7. Once you have added all your restrictions, recalculate the route: press the Calculate button. This time all
added restrictions will be taken into account.

To add restrictions to the route calculation by plotting them in the chart view, do the following:

1. Press the Add restriction button .

2. Draw a line or an area that will indicate the restricted zone on the
chart. To plot a point, left-click in the chart view; to delete a point,
right-click on the point; to move a point, left-click on the point to
capture it with the mouse pointer, move the point to a new location,
and left-click to release it.
3. To save the added restriction, press the Save restriction button
that has appeared in place of the Add restriction
button.

Figure 71 Adding own

99
restriction
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. Confirm or cancel the operation. To confirm the operation, press the Yes button, the restriction will be
added. You can add as many restrictions as you like.

5. To remove all manually entered restrictions, press the Remove all restrictions button
. You can only remove all the added restriction.
6. Once you have added all your restrictions, recalculate the route: press the Calculate button. This time all
added restrictions will be taken into account.

To save the route, do the following:

1. Press the Save as Route button. The Create New Route dialog will open.

Figure 72 Create New Route dialog

2. Enter the route name and press OK.
3. The new route is added to the routes list in the Route Route Planning panel where you can analyze,
check and correct the route if necessary.

6.4.2 Manual Route Planning

If you prefer to plot routes manually from the beginning to the end or if routes created automatically require
editing, use the manual route planning and editing functionality of the ECDIS. Using the functionality, you
can create new routes, edit existing routes, edit route schedules, add control points, check routes, etc.

To create a new route, do the following:

1. Open the Route Route Planning tab and press the New button. The Create New Route dialog will
open.

Figure 73 Route Route Planning tab

100
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. In the Create New Route dialog enter the name of the new route to the Enter name of a new Route
field and press OK.

Figure 74 Create New Route dialog

3. The new route will be created and added to the routes list. The ECDIS will switch to the route edit mode.
You can start plotting the route waypoints and enter other route information. More details about plotting
waypoints see below.

Figure 75 Route Route Planning tab, creating a new route

4. After all waypoints and route information have been added, press the Save button to save the route. To
save the route under a different name, press the Save as button, enter the new name to the Save route as
dialog, and press OK.

To plot waypoints of the route in the chart view, do the following:

Plot waypoint in the chart view Left-click in the chart view. A waypoint number (1) in an

orange circle will be plotted in the chart view. Move the pointer and you will see a thin red
line linking the point and the mouse pointer. The line marker can be useful for checking the leg and
the second waypoint position. To plot the next waypoint, left-click in a new position in the chart
view. The second waypoint (2) will appear. The next left-click will plot the next waypoint and so
on.
Add waypoint to the waypoints table To add a waypoint to the route using the keyboard, enter
the waypoint latitude and longitude to the LAT and LON fields of the WPT table. To do so, Left-
click in the LAT field of the WPT table to start entering the latitude, the 0000.000 value will
appear, enter your value for the waypoint latitude using the keyboard. Then enter the waypoint
longitude to the LON field. The waypoint will appear in the chart view in the set coordinates.

101
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 NOTE:
Waypoints are displayed in the chart view beginning with the 1:100 000 scale.

Move waypoint To change the position of a plotted waypoint, click with the left mouse button on
the waypoint, it will be captured by the mouse pointer. Move the waypoint to a new position and
release it by clicking with the LEFT mouse button once more.
Insert waypoint before the first one Move the mouse pointer over the first waypoint. The line
marker will be linked to it instead of the last waypoint. Left-click to plot a new point before the first
one. The new waypoint becomes the first waypoint of the route. Move the mouse pointer over the
last waypoint, wait for the line marker to link the last waypoint and the pointer, and resume adding
waypoints from the last one.
Insert waypoint between two existing waypoints In order to insert a waypoint between two
existing waypoints move the mouse pointer over the leg between them, a special symbol will appear

. Left-click in the new position, a new waypoint will be created, the waypoint is attached to
the pointer. Choose the waypoint position and left-click to plot the waypoint.
Delete waypoint To delete a waypoint, move the mouse pointer over it. The line marker will

disappear and a special symbol will be displayed. Right-click on the waypoint to delete it.
Delete waypoint in the waypoints table To delete a waypoint in the waypoints table, select it
and press the DELETE key: the waypoint is deleted both from the table and from the chart view. To
delete several waypoints, select them using SHIFT + Left-click or CTRL + Left-click combination
and press the DELETE key: all selected waypoints are deleted both from the table and from the
chart view.
Panning and zooming in or out While you are in the Edit mode any left-click plots a new point.
To pan the chart view, move the mouse pointer to the window border in the direction you want to
move the chart view. When the pointer changes to an arrow , left-click and the chart view will
move. To zoom the chart view in or out, use the Chart Scale panel options or the mouse wheel if
available. With the CTRL key held down, you can pan and zoom the chart view in the same way as
when in the regular chart view mode (to zoom out press and hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys
simultaneously).

NOTE:
If, when editing a route, you see that the route is colored red and one of
waypoints is marked with a cross, it means that the route legs are too close to
each other and their deviation corridors (XTD) are overlapped too much.
If route legs are situated too close to each other it can cause problems for
autopilot use; the route legs cannot be checked for dangers and cautions. Try
to avoid plotting route legs too close.
Figure 76 Warning about
too close route legs position

In the Route Route Planning tab, the following operations with routes are available:

102
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Edit To open a selected route in the route edit mode, select the route in the routes list and press
the Edit button. Only one route may be edited at a time. For more details, see chapter 6.4.3, Route
Edit Mode.
Delete To delete a selected route, select the route in the routes list, press the Delete button, and
confirm the operation.
Show To show a selected route in the chart view, select the route in the routes list and press the
Show button. The chart view will be scrolled and zoomed so that to display the whole route on the
screen.
Print To print a selected route, select the route in the routes list, press the Print button, and select
the route table to be printed out from the drop-down menu. The table will be converted to the
*.doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor (the program is installed together with ECDIS).
Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality (File Print).
Charts To view the set of charts covering a selected route, select the route in the routes list and
press the Charts button. Borders of charts covering the route will be displayed in the chart view.
Synchronize routes To synchronize routes between the local and remote computers after changes
have been made to one of available routes, save the changes, return to the Route Route
Planning tab (switch the route edit mode off), in the Synchronize routes with drop-down list
select computer to synchronize with and press the Synchronize routes with button. The
synchronization task will be added to the tasks list and executed in its turn (for details on the data
synchronization, see chapter 3.5, Data Synchronization).

6.4.3 Route Edit Mode

In the route edit mode you can edit the route plan, change route parameters, add control points to the route,
and edit the route schedule.
To switch to the route edit mode, in the Route Route Planning tab, select a route in the routes list and
press the Edit button. The route will be loaded and opened in the route edit mode.

Figure 77 Route Route Planning tab, route edit mode

In the route edit mode, the following operations with the route are available:
Edit route plan changes the WPT table (see chapter 6.4.4, Route Plan);
Add control points add entries to the CP table (see chapter 6.4.5, Adding Critical Points);
Edit route schedule change the Schedule table (see chapter 6.4.6, Editing Route Schedule);

103
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Save changes to save all changes introduced to the route, press the Save button. Once the route
has been saved, the ECDIS switches the route edit mode off and the standard Route Route
Planning panel opens.
Save route under a different name to save the route under a different name, press the Save as
button, enter the name in the Save Route as dialog, and press the OK button. The route with the
latest changes will be saved as a new route. The old route will remain in the routes list.
View the route in the chart view to view the route in the chart view, press the Show button. The
chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to display the whole route in the chart view.
Print the route plan (the WPT table) out to print the route plan out, press the Print Route button.
The WPT table will be converted to the *.doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor (the
program is installed together with ECDIS). Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing
functionality (File Print).
View charts covering the route to view charts that cover the route, press the Charts button. Charts
covering the whole selected route will be highlighted in the chart view.
Check the route for dangers to check the route for dangers, press the Check Route button. The
whole route is checked leg by leg and all found dangers and cautions are listed in the Dangers and
Cautions tabs. The tabs are created inside the Route Planning panel and organized in the same
way as the Object Info panel. Also all legs are marked with colors. These colors mean the
following:
Blue the Check route tool has not yet checked the leg;
Red the Check route tool has found dangers along the leg; presence of cautions does not
affect this highlighting;
Yellow the leg is a rhumb line with the length of more than 195 Miles and the tool is unable
to check it;
No color the Check route tool has found no dangers.
Set default route parameters to set parameters of the route that will be used as default when the
route is created, press the Parameters button, the Route Parameters window will open. Switch to
the Default Settings tab, set necessary parameters, and press the Apply button for the changes to
take effect. The following route parameters are available in the tab:
SPD(kn) speed on the leg, used by the ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from one
waypoint to the next one, in knots;
XTD(NM) allowable deviation from the
track along the leg from one waypoint to the
next, in nautical miles;
RAD(NM) turning radius at the waypoint, in
nautical miles;
Great Circle if the checkbox is set, route
legs are considered orthodromies; if the
checkbox is not set, route legs are considered
loxodromes;
Show WP turns on the display of waypoint Figure 78 Route Parameters window,
symbols in the chart view; if the checkbox is Default Settings tab
not set, waypoint symbols are not displayed;

104
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Show Speed turns on the display of speed on the leg values in the chart view;
Show Bearing turns on the display of bearing on the leg values in the chart view;
Show Named WP only (Schedule) if the checkbox is set, only waypoints that have names
are displayed in the Schedule table. This allows displaying waypoints that are especially
important for the timetable.
Change settings of several waypoints to change settings of several waypoints at one go, press the
Parameters button, the Route Parameters window will open. Switch to the Change Settings tab,
set the waypoints, between which route parameters will be changed, set necessary parameters, and
press the Apply button for the changes to take effect. The following route parameters are available
in the tab:
From WP/To WP in the From WP and To WP drop-down lists set the range of
waypoints, between which route parameters
will be changed.
SPD(kn) speed on the leg, used by the
ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from
one waypoint to the next one, in knots;
XTD(NM) allowable deviation from the
track along the leg from one waypoint to the
next, in nautical miles;
RAD(NM) turning radius at the waypoint, in
nautical miles;
Figure 79 Route Parameters window,
Great Circle if the checkbox is set, route Change Settings tab
legs are considered orthodromies; if the
checkbox is not set, route legs are considered loxodromes.

6.4.4 Route Plan

The route plan can be viewed only in the route edit mode.

To view the plan of a specified route, do the following:

1. Open the Route Route Planning tab.
2. Select a route in the routes list and press the Edit button. The route edit mode will be switched on.
3. In the route edit mode the route plan (WPT table), control points (CP table), and the route schedule
(Schedule table) are available.

105
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 80 Route Route Planning tab, route edit mode, Waypoints table
4. The following information is automatically entered and appears in the waypoint table as you plot
waypoints on the chart:
WP Waypoint number, cannot be changed.
LAT Waypoint latitude.
LON Waypoint longitude.
RAD(NM) Assigned turning radius at the waypoint. Expressed in nautical miles. Default value is
set in the Route Parameters Default Settings tab (press the Parameters button to open the
Route Parameters window).
XTD(NM) Cross Track Distance (XTD) deviation from the track along the leg from this
waypoint to the next. The XTD value is used for determining dangers and cautions along the route.
Expressed in nautical miles. Default value is set in the Route Parameters Default Settings tab
(press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window).
SPD Assigned speed on the leg from this waypoint to the next. Expressed in knots. Default value
is set in the Route Parameters Default Settings tab (press the Parameters button to open the
Route Parameters window).

RL A choice of whether Rhumb Line ( ) or Great Circle ( ) sailing will be applied from this
waypoint to the next. To switch between the Rhumb Line and Great Circle sailing click in the sell.
Default value is set in the Route Parameters Default Settings tab (press the Parameters button
to open the Route Parameters window).
DIST(xx) The distance from this waypoint to the next. Expressed in measurement units set in the
CONFIG Units and Time tab, Distance Units section. The parameter value is calculated
automatically and is not editable.
DTA(xx) Distance to Arrival distance from this waypoint to the last waypoint of the route
(destination). Expressed in measurement units set in the CONFIG Units and Time tab,
Distance Units section.
TTG Estimated time that will be spent for sailing from this waypoint to the next.
BWW Bearing Between Waypoints bearing from one waypoint to the next. Expressed in
degrees.
Name The name of the waypoint, optional parameter.

106
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. To save changes, press the Save button. All changes will be saved, and the route edit mode will be
switched off.

6.4.5 Adding Critical Points

You can specify a critical point on the route for the ECDIS to give an alarm if the own ship is going to reach
the critical point within a specified time or distance.

To set a critical point, do the following:

1. Open the Route Route Planning tab, select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route
edit mode.
2. In the route edit mode, switch to the CP table. Now you are in the control points edit mode and can add
new and edit existing critical points.

Figure 81 Route Route planning tab, Edit mode, critical points table
3. To plot a critical point in the chart view, move the mouse pointer to the critical point location and left-
click. The critical point will be added to the CP table. A critical point symbol is an orange circle with a
cross inside .
4. The other way to add a critical point is to enter its coordinates to the LAT and LON fields of the CP
table.
5. To move a critical point to a new position, left-click on it to capture the point with the mouse pointer,
move the point to a new position, and left-click once more to plot it there.
6. After the coordinates of the critical point have been set, add the following information about the critical
point to the CP table:
D/T Indicate if the system will give alarm when approaching the critical point within a specified
time or within a specified distance. For distance, you should put a tick sign in the cell and for
time, a dash sign. To select a sign, click in the cell and the sign that is now displayed will change
to the other.
DIST/TIME The value of the distance or the time at which the system should notify the mariner
about approaching the critical point. This field depends on the D/T choice.
Remark Here you can enter the critical point information.
7. To delete a critical point, right-click on it.

107
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
8. To print the CP table out, press the Print CP button. The CP table will be converted to the *.doc
format and opened in the Reach Text Editor (the program is installed together with ECDIS). Print the
table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality (File Print).
9. To save changes, press the Save button. All changes will be saved, and the route edit mode will be
switched off.

6.4.6 Editing Route Schedule

The route schedule is created together with the route itself. Times of navigation between waypoints are
calculated using the distance between the points and the own ship speed parameters. You can edit the route
schedule entries: change time of departure and allocate time for stops in waypoints.

To edit the route schedule, do the following:

1. Open the Route Route Planning tab, select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route
edit mode.
2. In the route edit mode, switch to the Schedule table. Now you can edit the route schedule.

Figure 82 Route Route planning tab, Edit mode, Schedule table

3. The following route schedule parameters are displayed in the Schedule table:
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated date and time of arrival to the waypoint. Can be set
by the user.
ETD Estimated Time of Departure Estimated date and time of departure from the waypoint.
Can be set by the user.

NOTE:
If you change the arrival or departure time/date, the ETA and ETD for each waypoint are changed
accordingly.

Stop dur. Stop duration at the waypoint. It can be applied for waypoints representing pilot
stations and ports, as a route can include a number of intermediate ports of call.

108
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Speed Estimated speed in knots on the leg from this waypoint to the next. It is taken from the
WPT table and can be changed here. If you change the speed value in the Schedule table, it is
changed in the WPT table too.
DIST The distance from the waypoint to the next one along the leg. Expressed in measurement
units set in the CONFIG Units and Time tab, the Distance Units section. The Distance is taken
from the Waypoints table.
Time to Next Time that will be spent to reach the next waypoint. It is calculated as speed divided
by distance.
4. Above the table, the total distance and the total duration of the route are displayed.
5. To display only named waypoints in the Schedule table, check the Only named WP checkbox.
6. To save changes, press the Save button. All changes will be saved, and the route edit mode will be
switched off.

6.4.7 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a File

It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference. This chapter explains how to
exports routes to and import them from files.

To export a route to a file, do the following:

1. Open the Route Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To File tab.

Figure 83 Route Export/Import tab, From/To File tab

2. Select a route to export in the routes table.
3. Enter the file name to the field above the folder tree and select the file format (INI or RTE/WPL) in the
file formats drop-down list.
INI Routes are saved in files with the *.route extension.
RTE/WPL Routes are saved in files with the *.rte extension. Unlike the *.route files
intended for the ECDIS only, *.rte files can be imported to many devices.
4. In the folder tree window, select the folder where the route will be saved. If in the folder there are other
route files, they will be displayed in the panel to the right from the folder tree.
To delete a route file from the files list, select the file, press the DELETE key, and confirm the operation.

109
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. To export the route, press the Export button. If the route is exported successfully, the message Route
was exported successfully will appear and the file name will be listed in the files list pane.

To import a route from a file, do the following:

1. Open the Route Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To File tab.
2. In the folder tree, select the folder where the route file is stored. All route files stored in the selected
folder will be listed in the pane to the right from the folder tree.
In case the file you need is not on the list, make sure you have selected the right folder and check the file
format selected in the formats drop-down list. The format set in the formats drop-down list should be the
same as that of the route file you want to import.
3. Select the route file and press the Import button. The route from the file will be imported to the ECDIS
and its name will be displayed in routes list.
4. In case there are several routes in the specified file (only for *.route files), you will be prompted to
select one of the routes in the Select Route Name dialog.

Figure 84 Route Export/Import tab, select the route to import

In the Select Route Name dialog, you can also change the output route name by entering a new name to
the Output Route Name field; and reverse the output route by checking the Reverse Route checkbox.
After the route has been selected and other parameters set, press the OK button to import the route.

110
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.4.8 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a Device
It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference. This chapter explains how to
exports routes to and import them from external devices.

To export a route to a device, do the following:

1. Open the Route Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To Device tab.

Figure 85 Route Export/Import tab, From/To Device tab

2. In the Device Name drop-down list, select the name of the device to which the route will be exported.
The list contains devices registered in the Config Input/Output tab.
3. In the Device Type list, select the type of the device.
4. In the Route to Export drop down list, select the route to export.
5. Press the Export button. The route will be exported to the specified device as RTE and WPL sentences.
Upon completion of the operation, the message will be displayed The route was successfully exported.

To import a route from a device, do the following:

1. Open the Route Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To Device tab.
2. In the Device Name drop-down list, select the name of the device from which the route will be imported.
The list contains devices registered in the Config Input/Output tab.
3. In the Device Type list, select the type of the device.
4. Press the Import button. The ECDIS will start reading RTE and WPL sentences from the specified
device. Progress of the route import is displayed in the Progress section progress bar.

NOTE:
In case the ECDIS failed to start receiving the route from the very first sentence, an error message will
appear. In that case close the message, cancel import by pressing the Cancel button in the Progress section,
and press the Import button once more.

111
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. Upon completion of the route import, the message will appear: Route X is received.
Would you like to import more routes? To go on with importing routes, press the Yes
button; to save the received route, press the No button.
6. To save the route, enter the route name to the Enter new route name dialog and press
the OK button. If you press the Cancel button, the route will be saved under a default
Figure 86 Enter
name.
new route name
7. After the route has been saved, you can edit it in the Route Route Planning panel.

6.5 Tides and Tidal Streams Data

Tides and currents information is included in the database as a supplementary section. The data include
locations of tidal and current stations, tidal ranges and other information.
You can turn on the display of tides and currents in the chart view and view information about each tide in
the Info Tides Info tab and about each current in the Info Streams Info tab.

6.5.1 Tides Information

Information about tides is available in the Info Tides Info panel.

To access tides information, do the following:

1. Open the Info Tides Info panel and set the Switch Tides On/Off checkbox to turn on the display of
tides information in the chart view. Special yellow symbols of tidal stations and tidal stream
stations appear on the map (the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1:5 000 000) and the list
of all tidal stations is displayed in the pane below the Switch Tides On/Off checkbox.
2. To view information about a tide, you should select it. To select a tide, right-click on it in the chart or
find it in the tidal stations list and select it there. Information about the tide is displayed in the Tide Info
section.

Figure 87 Info Tides Info tab

3. After the tide has been found, information about it (as well as the
information about a tidal stream) can be displayed for any date and time. To
set the date and time, use the time configuration tool (the same for Tides
Info and Streams Info panels). Using the tool you can do the following
actions: Figure 88 Time setting

112
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Choose the time type (UTC Time or Local Time) in the time type drop-down list (Local Time is the
difference between the UTC Time and the Time Zone).
Set the date and time for calculation of tides and streams characteristics set the date and time in
the date and time field (under the time type drop-down list).
Make the current date and time the date and time for calculation of tides
and streams characteristics. To do so, press the Current Time button. The
date and time field will became grayed and the value in the field will
change to the current date and time value.
Figure 89 Selecting
Results of tides and streams calculation can be presented either in UTC time type for tides
time or in local time formats. Select the time format for the tides information
information in the drop-down list in the lower left corner of the Tide Info
section.
4. To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated in the chart view press the Play button. Each new
position of a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period.
5. Tide Info Displays tide or stream information in the selected station. General tides information
includes the following parameters:
Time Zone The time difference between standard (local) time of tide location and UTC.
Tide Type Can be Diurnal, Mixed Diurnal, Mixed Semi-Diurnal and Semi-Diurnal.
From High Water Time passed from the last high water event.
From Low Water Time passed from the last low water event.
Current Water Level Shows the water level of the specified Tidal object, at the time set in the
input time field.
6. Detailed information about the tidal object is represented in the Graph, High/Low Water and Water
Levels tabs:
Graph Tidal height (in meters) depends on time and is graphically expressed on the diagram. The
diagram background consists of three color zones. These zones graphically show night time (dark
grey), twilights (light grey) and daytime (white). The red vertical line on the graph marks the time
entered in the date-time field. In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram: when
you move the mouse pointer over the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal heights are
shown below allowing you to obtain detailed tidal information.

Figure 90 Tidal information, graph

High/Low Water Summary information about time and height of high and low water is given.

113
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 91 Tidal information, high/low water schedule
Water Levels Provides information about water level height predictions for next three days,
starting from the current day. The step of such predictions is one hour.

Figure 92 Tidal information, water levels plan

6.5.2 Tidal Streams Information

Information about tides is available in the Info Streams Info panel.

To access tidal streams information, do the following:

1. Open the Info Streams Info panel and set the Switch Tides On/Off checkbox to turn on the display
of tides and streams information in the chart view. Special yellow symbols of tidal stations and tidal
stream stations appear on the map (the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1:5 000 000).
2. To view information about a tidal stream, you should select it. To select a stream, right-click on it in the
chart. Information about the stream will be immediately displayed in the tab.

Figure 93 Info Streams Info tab

114
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. After the tidal stream station has been selected, you can get information about the stream for any date
and time. To set the date and time, use the date and time tool. The tool is described in detail in chapter
6.5.1, Tides Information.
4. To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated on the chart, press the Play button. Each new position of
a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period.
5. In the left-hand part of the panel the following general information about the selected stream is
displayed:
Time Zone Time difference between standard (local) time of tidal stream and UTC.
Direction Direction of the tidal stream.
Speed Speed of the tidal stream.
Flood/Ebb Shows if the current tidal stream object is in the flood or ebb state.
6. Detailed information about the tidal stream is represented in the Graph and Speed/Directions tabs:
Graph Tidal stream speed (in knots) dependent on time is graphically expressed on the diagram.
The diagram background consists of three color zones. These zones graphically show night time
(dark grey), twilights (light grey) and daytime (white). The red vertical line on the graph marks the
time entered in the date-time field. Two display modes are available by switching the Direct.
Changes button:
Considering the stream state - the button Direct. Changes is pressed. The vertical diagram
axis will be divided into two parts by a red horizontal line. In the top part, the speed of the
tidal stream in the flood state is shown; and in the bottom part, the speed of the tidal stream in
the ebb state is shown.

Figure 94 Tidal stream information, graph

Not considering the stream state - the button Direct. Changes is outpressed. The diagram
displays absolute values of speed and direction without taking into account flood and ebb
states.

Figure 95 Tidal stream information, graph, absolute speed and direction values

115
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 The direction of the tidal stream is graphically shown for every hour as green arrows. The blue thin
graph line is a graph of water height levels of the tidal High/Low station related to the tidal stream,
in case the tidal stream is linked to any tidal station at all. Please note that it is only a schematically
drawn graph without any level marks.
In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram. When you move the mouse pointer
over the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal stream direction and speed are shown below
allowing you to obtain more detailed information.

NOTE:
The graph can be displayed in the two modes not for all tidal streams. This option depends on the data for
each tidal stream stored in the database. In case it is impossible to define ebb and flood states for a tidal
stream, the graph can only be displayed in one mode, and the Direct. Changes button will not be displayed
in the graph area at all.

Speeds/Directions summary information about time, speed and direction of a selected current
stream is given.

Figure 96 Tidal stream information, Speeds and Directions table

6.5.3 Astronomical Information

Information about celestial bodies is available in the INFO Astro Info tab.

To access information about celestial bodies, do the following:

1. Open the Info Astro Info tab.

Figure 97 Info Astro Info tab

116
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. If a tidal or a tidal stream station is currently selected, astronomical information is presented for
coordinates of the selected station and the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude
fields. For calculating the local time, if this time type is selected in the drop-down list at the bottom of
the time and coordinates pane, the time zone of the selected station is used (the time zone is displayed in
the Time Zone field). The Latitude, Longitude, and Time Zone fields are grayed and you can only
change date and time.
3. If no tidal or tidal stream station is currently selected, astronomical information is presented for
coordinates of the current chart view center, the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and
Longitude fields. For calculating the local time, if this time type is selected in the drop-down list at the
bottom of the time and coordinates pane, select the time zone in the Time Zone drop-down list.
4. Using date and time tool, set the date and time you need astronomical data for. The Reset Time button
resets the time to the current time. The current time is displayed for the time zone selected in the Time
Zone and Daylight bias drop-down list.
Time format for the date and time display in the date and time field is set using the drop-down list in the
upper left corner of the tab. Time format for the display of astronomical information is set using the
drop-down list in the lower left corner of the tab.
5. Astronomical information is displayed in the three tabs inside the Info Astro Info tab: the Sun,
Moon, and Planets tabs.
Sun Provides information about the current position and height of the sun above the horizon as
well as about the sunrise, twilight and sunset for the input date. The information is presented in
three tabs: Standard Transit, Civil Twilight, and Nautical Twilight.
Moon Provides information about the current position and height of the moon above the horizon;
also includes information on the rising, decline and the following phases of the moon for the input
date. The information is presented in two tabs: Moon Transit and Moon Phase.
Planets Provides information about planets selected in the planets drop-down list including the
current position, the height above the horizon, the rising and the decline for the input date for the
specified planet.

117
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.6 Weather Forecast: Download

IMPORTANT:

Weather downloading procedure can take considerable time during which other functions of ECDIS are not
available. It is highly recommended to download weather data when not in operational mode.

The ECDIS implements the functionality allowing you to use Jeppesen Weather service. Using the weather
functionality you can download weather and cyclones forecasts, display weather data on the chart, as well as
analyze routes in terms of weather conditions along them and set alarms based on specified values of weather
parameters.
Weather forecasts are produced as GRIB files and cyclones forecasts as XML files. The forecasts are made
for a specified period of time and you can see the weather parameters change within the time period for
which the forecast was created. The forecasts include data for a number of weather parameters such as
pressure, wind, precipitation, etc. The parameters can be displayed on the chart separately.
Readings of weather parameters are provided at regular intervals of time. The time for weather display can
be set with a special time tool. If there is no reading of a weather parameter for the time set for the parameter
display, the parameter value will be interpolated.
To get access to downloading weather data you will have to download subscription first. Subscription
provides information on weather products and weather parameters available to you. You can download
weather data over the Internet using the HTTP connection or by e-mail.

6.6.1 Weather Subscription

After you have subscribed to the Weather Forecast Service you should download weather subscription to the
ECDIS.
Weather subscription information includes the list of products you have subscribed to. For each product the
following information is provided: type of the geographical weather model, validity period, coverage, area
limit, forecast period and time step, and a list of forecast elements provided for each product (pressure,
temperature, and so on). You are allowed to download only those weather products that are listed in your
weather subscription.

118
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To download weather subscription, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Packages tab, press the Settings button and select the Subscription
option from the drop-down menu. The Weather Subscription window will open with a message that the
subscription is not found.

Figure 98 Weather Weather Packages tab

NOTE:
You are asked to download subscription information when you start downloading weather data for the first
time (no matter which downloading option you are using).

2. To obtain subscription, press the Request Subscription button in the lower left corner of the Weather
Subscription window.

Figure 99 Weather Subscription window, "The subscription was not found" message
3. Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters (see chapter 6.6.7,
Weather Download Setup) you will have to perform the following actions:

119
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Automatic communication Internet (HTTP), E-mail (SMTP/POP3), E-mail (MAPI)
1). Press the Request Subscription button.
2). In case the Automatic send/receive parameter is set in the connection setup, subscription
request will be sent and subscription received and downloaded automatically.
3). If the Automatic send/receive parameter is not set, the subscription request is saved in the
Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode. To send the request, press the Send/Receive
button in the Weather Packages tab. Data will be received and downloaded automatically.
Semi-automatic communication E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Request Subscription button, the subscription request file will be generated and
saved to the Send folder. Request files have a predefined name format
request_xxxxx.xml.
2). Send the subscription file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
3). You will receive the subscription file in the response e-mail, save the file to the Receive
folder.
4). The ECDIS will load the subscription automatically.
Manual communication E-mail (Manually via Attachment)
1). Press the Request Subscription button.
2). Save the generated subscription file to any location on your computer. Request files have a
predefined name format request_xxxxx.xml.
3). Send the file as an attachment to an e-mail letter to [email protected]. You will receive
the subscription in the response e-mail.
4). Save the subscription to any location on your computer.
5). Download the subscription to the ECDIS. To download the data, open the Weather
Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button.
6). In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button. The files
will be downloaded to the ECDIS. If the received data package is split into several files,
download all the files of the package one by one; when the last file of the package is
downloaded (the order of downloading is of no importance), the package appears in the
Weather Packages window (for more details on the Weather Packages window, see chapter
6.6.6, Weather Packages Handling).

120
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To view weather subscription, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Packages tab, press the Settings button and select the Subscription
option from the drop-down menu.
2. The Weather Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there.

Figure 100 Weather Subscription window

In case you have changed weather data subscription terms, you will have to renew weather subscription.

To renew weather subscription, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Weather Packages tab, press the Settings button and select the Subscription
option from the drop-down menu.
2. The Weather Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there.
3. Press the Request Subscription button. Your further actions on sending/receiving subscription depend
on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters (for details see the downloading
subscription procedure above).

NOTE:
Weather subscription is renewed automatically every time you receive a new weather package.

6.6.2 Easy Mode Setup and Download

The Easy Mode download option is a preset option and allows you downloading weather forecasts with one
click.
This option allows downloading of all weather products listed in your subscription. Configure weather
download request using the Setup Easy Mode function.
After the request is configured you can order data by simply pressing the Download button in the Weather
Presentation (Easy Mode) or Weather Packages panels.

121
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To download weather data using the Easy Mode option, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) or the Weather Weather Packages tab.
Both these tabs have the Download button.

Figure 101 Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Figure 102 Weather Weather Packages,
Mode), Download button Download button

2. Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters (see chapter 6.6.7,
Weather Download Setup) you will have to perform the following actions:
Automatic communication Internet (HTTP), E-mail (SMTP/POP3), E-mail (MAPI)
1). Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request
confirmation dialog.
2). In case the Automatic send/receive parameter is set in the connection setup, the data request
will be sent and data received and downloaded automatically.
3). If the Automatic send/receive parameter is not set, the data request is saved in the Weather
Packages tab in the waiting mode. To send the request, press the Send/Receive button in the
Weather Packages tab. Data will be received and downloaded automatically.
Semi-automatic communication E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request
confirmation dialog.
2). A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder. Request files have a
predefined name format request_xxxxx.xml.
3). Send the data request file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
4). You will receive weather data files in the response e-mail, save the files to the Receive folder.
5). The ECDIS will load the data automatically.

122
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Manual communication E-mail (Manually via Attachment)
1). Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request
confirmation dialog.
2). A data request file will be generated. Save the file to any location on your computer.
3). Send the file as an attachment to an e-mail letter to [email protected]. You will receive
data files in the response e-mail.
4). Save the files to any location on your computer.
5). Download the weather data to the ECDIS. To download the data, open the Weather
Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button.
6). In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button. The files
will be downloaded to the ECDIS. If the received data package is split into several files,
download all the files of the package one by one; when the last file of the package is
downloaded (the order of downloading is of no importance), the package appears in the
Weather Packages window (for more details on the Weather Packages window, see chapter
6.6.6, Weather Packages Handling).

To setup the Easy Mode option, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Weather Packages panel.
2. Press the Settings button and select the Setup Easy Mode option from the drop-down menu. The
Weather Download Request dialog will open.
In the request dialog you can add a product to the request, set the product parameters, remove a product
from the request, set a geographic area for which a forecast is required, set the period for which you need
weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.

Figure 103 Weather Download Request dialog, Easy Mode Setup

3. To add a product to the request, press the Add new product button and select the product you want to
add in the drop-down list. The product appears in the table and is removed from the Add new product
list.

123
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. To set the product parameters, click on the plus + sign near the product name to expand the product
parameters list (to collapse the list, press the minus - sign near the product name) and check those
weather parameters you want to receive.

Figure 104 Weather Download Request dialog, setting a product parameters

5. To remove a product from the request, press the product Remove button .
6. To set a geographic area to be covered by the forecast data, choose a predefined coverage from the drop-
down list or set your own coverage. To open the list of coverage options, press the arrow near the current
coverage name. To set a new coverage:
a. Press the arrow near the current coverage name and, in the drop-down list, select the Add New
Coverage option or press the Add New Coverage button . The Edit Coverage window opens.

Figure 105 Edit Coverage window

b. Initially the New Coverage boundaries are boundaries of your current screen view. You can set
new boundaries either by entering new coordinate values to the North, South, East, and West
fields (coordinate values are in degrees, minutes and fractions of minute) or by selecting a new
coverage on the screen.

124
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 c. To select a new coverage on the screen, move the mouse pointer to the edge of the coverage
displayed on the screen (a red frame). When the pointer changes to the horizontal resize pointer
, click the right mouse button and drag the coverage boundary holding the button. Release the
button when the coverage boundary is in the right place. You can also move the coverage: move the
mouse inside the selected area, the pointer will change to the move pointer , press the right
mouse button and move the coverage. Release the button when the coverage area is in the right
place. Coordinate values in the North, South, West, and East fields of the Edit Coverage window
change in accordance with selection on the screen.
d. After you have defined boundaries of the new coverage, press the Apply button to save the settings
in the list of coverage areas.
e. To restore initial coverage boundaries (the screen coverage boundaries set when the Edit Coverage
window has just been opened), press the Reset Area button.
f. To scroll the screen so that a specified coverage area was in the center of the screen, press the Go to
button.
g. To create a new coverage, press the New Coverage button. The name of the new coverage will
appear in the list. The default new coverage name is New Coverage #x, you can change the name
to any name you like.
h. To delete a coverage, select it in the list of coverage options and press the Delete button.
i. To return to the Weather Request Download window, press the OK button. All new coverage
areas will be in the list of coverage areas. If you press the Cancel button, the new areas will not be
preserved in the list of coverage areas.
7. You can view a selected coverage area from the Weather Download Request dialog. To do so, press the
Go to Coverage button in the request table.
8. In the Period field, select time period for which you need weather forecast.
9. In the TimeStep field, select time step at which weather parameters readings from the weather package
are made.
10. In the Size field, an approximately estimated weather package size is displayed. The total size of the
request is displayed in the Total information panel at the lower right corner of the window.
11. The Forecast for box is only active for Historical Weather function and the Download at box is only
active for the Scheduled Download function.
12. To reset the Easy Mode data request to the default settings, press the Reset button.
13. To save the data request for the use, press the OK button. The Easy Mode request configuration will be
saved. The request is used each time you download data using the Easy Mode download option.

125
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.6.3 Overview and Coastal Download
The Overview and Coastal download options are preset options.
The Overview download option only allows downloading the Global ECMWF 150 km weather model (the
European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 150 km grid) and Tropical
Cyclones data.
The Coastal download option only allows downloading the Global ECMWF 50 km weather model (the
European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 50 km grid) and Tropical
Cyclones data.

To download weather data using the Overview or Coastal download options, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) or the Weather Weather Packages tab.
Both these tabs have the Download button. Press the arrow near the button to open the download options
menu. Select the Overview or Coastal option. The Weather Download Request dialog will open.

Figure 106 Weather Weather Presentation Figure 107 Weather Weather Packages,
(Easy Mode), Download button Download button

2. In the Weather Download Request dialog, you can set the product parameters, remove a product from
the request, set a geographic area for which a forecast is required, set the period for which you need
weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.

Figure 108 Weather Download Request dialog, Overview/Coastal request dialog

126
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. Set the data request: select product parameters in the Products field, set data coverage in the Coverage
field, select the forecast period in the Period field, and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field.
Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6.6.2, Easy Mode Setup
and Download, the Setup Easy Mode procedure.
4. Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters (see chapter 6.6.7,
Weather Download Setup) you will have to perform the following actions:
Automatic communication Internet (HTTP), E-mail (SMTP/POP3), E-mail (MAPI)
1). Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server.
2). In case the Automatic send/receive parameter is set in the connection setup, the data request
will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically.
3). If the Automatic send/receive parameter is not set, the data request is saved in the Weather
Packages tab in the waiting mode. To send the request, press the Send/Receive button in the
Weather Packages tab. Data will be received and downloaded automatically.
Semi-automatic communication E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Send Request button. A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send
folder. Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx.xml.
2). Send the data request file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
3). You will receive weather data files in the response e-mail, save the files to the Receive folder.
4). The ECDIS will load the data automatically.
Manual communication E-mail (Manually via Attachment)
1). Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server.
2). A data request file will be generated. Save the file to any location on your computer.
3). Send the file as an attachment to an e-mail letter to [email protected]. You will receive
data files in the response e-mail.
4). Save the files to any location on your computer.
5). Download the weather data to the ECDIS. To download the data, open the Weather
Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button.
6). In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button. The files
will be downloaded to the ECDIS. If the received data package is split into several files,
download all the files of the package one by one; when the last file of the package is
downloaded (the order of downloading is of no importance), the package appears in the
Weather Packages window (for more details on the Weather Packages window, see chapter
6.6.7, Weather Download Setup).

127
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.6.4 Custom Download
The Custom download option allows downloading all weather products listed in your subscription.

To download weather data using the Custom download option, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) or the Weather Weather Packages tab.
Both these tabs have the Download button. Press the arrow near the button to open the download options
menu. Select the Custom option. The Weather Download Request dialog will open.

Figure 109 Weather Weather Presentation Figure 110 Weather Weather Packages,
(Easy Mode), Download button Download button

2. In the Weather Download Request dialog, you can add products to the request, set products parameters,
remove products from the request, set geographic areas for which forecasts are required, set periods for
which you need weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.

Figure 111 Weather Download Request dialog, Custom request dialog

3. Set the data request: add products from the Add new product drop-down list, select product parameters
in the Products field, set data coverage in the Coverage field, select the forecast period in the Period
field, and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field. Details about using the Weather Download
Request dialog see in the chapter 6.6.2, Easy Mode Setup and Download, the Setup Easy Mode
procedure.

128
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. You can save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later. To
do so, press the Save Request button, in the Save As dialog, indicate the location where the file will be
saved, enter the file name, and press the Save button. The request configuration will be saved to an
*.xml file.
5. To download a previously saved request configuration, press the Load Request button, in the Open
dialog, select the request configuration file, and press the Open button. The request configuration will be
loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog.
6. After the request has been configured, you can download data. Depending on the communication type set
in the Setup Connection parameters (see chapter 6.6.7, Weather Download Setup) you will have to
perform the following actions:
Automatic communication Internet (HTTP), E-mail (SMTP/POP3), E-mail (MAPI)
1). Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server.
2). In case the Automatic send/receive parameter is set in the connection setup, the data request
will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically.
3). If the Automatic send/receive parameter is not set, the data request is saved in the Weather
Packages tab in the waiting mode. To send the request, press the Send/Receive button in the
Weather Packages tab. Data will be received and downloaded automatically.
Semi-automatic communication E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Send Request button. A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send
folder. Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx.xml.
2). Send the data request file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
3). You will receive weather data files in the response e-mail, save the files to the Receive folder.
4). The ECDIS will load the data automatically.
Manual communication E-mail (Manually via Attachment)
1). Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server.
2). A data request file will be generated. Save the file to any location on your computer.
3). Send the file as an attachment to an e-mail letter to [email protected]. You will receive
data files in the response e-mail.
4). Save the files to any location on your computer.
5). Download the weather data to the ECDIS. To download the data, open the Weather
Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button.
6). In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button. The files
will be downloaded to the ECDIS. If the received data package is split into several files,
download all the files of the package one by one; when the last file of the package is
downloaded (the order of downloading is of no importance), the package appears in the
Weather Packages window (for more details on the Weather Packages window, see chapter
6.6.6, Weather Packages Handling).

129
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6.6.5 Scheduled Download
If you would like to receive e-mails with weather package files at a given time each day, the Scheduled
download is the solution. The Scheduled download option allows downloading all weather products listed in
your subscription.

NOTE:
The Scheduled download option is available only for e-mail communication types.

To download weather data using the Scheduled download option, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) or the Weather Weather Packages tab.
Both these tabs have the Download button. Press the arrow near the button to open the download options
menu. Select the Scheduled option. The Weather Download Request dialog will open.

Figure 112 Weather Weather Presentation Figure 113 Weather Weather Packages,
(Easy Mode), Download button Download button

2. In the Weather Download Request dialog, you can add products to the request, set products parameters,
remove products from the request, set geographic areas for which forecasts are required, set periods for
which you need weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.

Figure 114 Weather Download Request dialog, Scheduled request dialog

130
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. Set the data request: add products from the Add new product drop-down list, select product parameters
in the Products field, set data coverage in the Coverage field, select the forecast period in the Period
field, and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field. Details about using the Weather Download
Request dialog see in the chapter 6.6.2, Easy Mode Setup and Download, the Setup Easy Mode
procedure.
4. You can save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later. To
do so, press the Save Request button, in the Save As dialog, indicate the location where the file will be
saved, enter the file name, and press the Save button. The request configuration will be saved to an
*.xml file.
5. To download a previously saved request configuration, press the Load Request button, in the Open
dialog, select the request configuration file, and press the Open button. The request configuration will be
loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog.
6. After the request has been configured, in the Download at box select or enter the time at which you want
to receive weather data every day.
7. Press the Send Request button. Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection
parameters (see chapter 6.6.7, Weather Download Setup) you will have to perform the following actions:
Automatic communication E-mail (SMTP/POP3), E-mail (MAPI)
1). Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server.
2). In case the Automatic send/receive parameter is set in the connection setup, the data request
will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically.
3). If the Automatic send/receive parameter is not set, the data request is saved in the Weather
Packages tab in the waiting mode. To send the request, press the Send/Receive button in the
Weather Packages tab. Data will be received and downloaded automatically.
Semi-automatic communication E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Send Request button. A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send
folder. Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx.xml.
2). Send the data request file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
3). You will receive weather data files in the response e-mail, save the files to the Receive folder.
4). The ECDIS will load the data automatically.
Manual communication E-mail (Manually via Attachment)
1). Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server.
2). A data request file will be generated. Save the file to any location on your computer.
3). Send the file as an attachment to an e-mail letter to [email protected]. You will receive
data files in the response e-mail.
4). Save the files to any location on your computer.
5). Download the weather data to the ECDIS. To download the data, open the Weather
Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button.

131
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 6). In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button. The files
will be downloaded to the ECDIS. If the received data package is split into several files,
download all the files of the package one by one; when the last file of the package is
downloaded (the order of downloading is of no importance), the package appears in the
Weather Packages window (for more details on the Weather Packages window, see chapter
6.6.6, Weather Packages Handling).
8. If you want to stop receiving scheduled weather data, press the Delete all scheduled button in the
Weather Data Request dialog for Scheduled download. Take into account that you cannot cancel one or
several scheduled requests. You can only cancel all of the requests.

6.6.6 Weather Packages Handling

Each time you order a weather forecast, the request of the forecast is listed in the Weather Weather
Packages tab. In the tab, you can see the progress of the request processing. After the data has been received
weather data come from the weather server as data packages entries for weather data requests in the
Weather Packages tab become entries for the received weather data packages. To be able to use the data,
you should unpack and load them to the ECDIS.
In the Weather Weather Packages tab you can display detailed information about the data requests and
received data packages, download a weather package to the ECDIS in case it was received by e-mail, initiate
a send/receive operation in case it is not done automatically, display weather data received in a package on
the chart, delete a package, and save a package as a *.grb or an *.xml file.

Figure 115 Weather Weather Packages tab

The following data packages handling operations are available in the Weather Packages tab:
Downloading weather packages to the ECDIS: Import of weather packages is only necessary in case
you are using the E-Mail (Manually via attachment) communication type.
With the E-Mail (Manually via attachment) communication type you will have files with weather
packages saved in some location on your computer. To be able to use the data you will need to load
the files to the ECDIS. To load weather packages, press the Import JWP button, in the Open
dialog select the packages files and press the Open button. The files will be loaded to the ECDIS.
Viewing extended information about a data request or a data package: To view expanded
information about a data request that is being processed or a received weather package, select the
package in the packages table and press the Expand Info button (the button label will change to
Hide Info). The information will be displayed in the window below. To hide the information, press
the Hide Info button.

132
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Initiating the send/receive process: The Send/Receive button initiates the data exchange procedure
for a data request in case it is not done automatically. The data exchange procedure includes
sending the weather data request to the weather server and receiving and proceeding weather data
packages. The automatic send/receive should be set through the Setup Connection function (see
chapter 6.6.7, Weather Download Setup).
Displaying weather data on the chart: The Display button displays weather data received in a
specified weather package on the chart. To display weather data, select a weather package in the
packages list and press the Display button.

IMPORTANT:

If a package is deleted without saving data to a GRIB or XML file (the Save button), you will not be able to
recover the data. To get the deleted weather data you will have to request and receive them once more.

Deleting a weather request or a weather data package: The Delete button deletes specified weather
packages from the packages list. To delete a package select it in the packages list and press the
Delete button.
Saving data to a GRIB or XML file: The Save button allows saving a specified weather data
package to your computer. The data package is saved as a GRIB or an XML file: weather forecast
data are saved to a GRIB file and cyclones data are saved to an XML file. To open the files use the
Open GRIB and Open Cyclones buttons on the Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) panel (see
chapter 6.7, Weather Forecast: Display).

6.6.7 Weather Download Setup

Weather forecast data are transferred over the Internet. In the ECDIS, you can use either HTTP (Internet) or
e-mail connection. The ECDIS uses the HTTP (Internet) connection by default and has to be connected to
the Internet to be able to transfer data. The connection with the weather server has to be configured through
the Setup Connection function.

133
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To configure connection, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Packages tab, press the Settings button, and select the Setup
Connection option from the drop-down menu. The Setup Connection dialog will open.

Figure 116 Setup Connection window

2. Set the communication type: select the communication type in the Communication type drop-down list.
You can choose between HTTP (Internet) and e-mail connection. To comply with different ship or office
communication set-ups, you are offered four e-mail connection types: SMTP/POP3, Inbox via MAPI,
Folder Send/Recv, and Manually via Attachment. See detailed description of all communication
connections further on in the manual.
3. Set the data center: set the center on the continent where you are now to have data transferred faster.
Select the data center in the Data center drop-down list. So far, only the Europe data center is available,
please check for other available centers later.
4. Set the timeout time period during which the answer from weather data server is awaited (relevant for
HTTP, SMTP/POP3, and Inbox via MAPI connections). Enter the timeout value in seconds to the
Timeout field.
5. Set the attachment size in the Attachment size field. The attachment size is the maximum size of a data
pack that can be attached to an e-mail sent to you (relevant for all e-mail connections). In case the set
attachment size is less than the size of the ordered weather package, the package is broken down into
several data packages that are sent to you in several e-mails. Set the parameter to {0} or {-1} if you want
weather packages of any size to be sent to you in one e-mail.
6. Set communication parameters in the Communication parameters section. Depending on the type of
communication you selected in the Communication type option, you will be given a possibility to
configure a set of parameters specific for the selected communication type.
7. After you have configured connection you can save settings for further use: press the Export settings
button, in the Save As dialog window, indicate location where the file with settings will be saved, enter
the file name and press the Save button. The settings will be saved to an *.xml file.
8. To load previously saved settings: press the Import settings button, in the Open dialog window select
the *.xml file with saved settings and press the Open button. The settings from the file will be loaded.

134
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 The following communication types are available:
Internet (HTTP): Automatic connection type. If you set the Internet (HTTP) communication type, the
ECDIS will use the standard HTTP protocol to send requests and receive weather data. You can
configure HTTP parameters in the Setup Connection window in the HTTP parameters branch of the
connection parameters tree.

Figure 117 Setup Connection window, Internet (HTTP) communication type

Automatic send/receive: if the parameter is set, data requests are sent to the weather server
automatically; if the parameter is not set, data requests are put first to the waiting list in the
Weather Weather Packages tab, and sent to the server on the user command.
The HTTP proxy type parameter can be set to the following values:
Direct connection Use the option if you do not use proxy server to provide connection to
the Internet.
Automatic discovery Use the option if you do not know exact parameters of your proxy
server, or if you are not sure that your internet connection is provided through a proxy server.
Set this option and the program will find proxy server automatically.
Manual configuration Use the option if your internet connection is provided through a
proxy server and you know all parameters of the server.

135
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 E-Mail (SMTP/POP3): Automatic connection type. If you set the E-Mail (SMTP/POP3) e-mail
connection option, the ECDIS is acting as an e-mail program and is using standard incoming and
outgoing data transfer protocols. In the Setup Connection window you can configure protocols settings
in the E-Mail Parameters branch of the connection parameters tree.

Figure 118 Setup Connection window, E-Mail (SMTP/POP3) communication type

E-Mail (Inbox via MAPI): Automatic connection type. If you set the E-Mail (Inbox via MAPI)
connection option, the ECDIS will use the e-mail program installed on your computer to send data
requests and receive weather data files. For the ECDIS to be able to use your e-mail program, the
program should support MAPI (Messaging API). The ECDIS then processes received weather data and
loads weather packages automatically.
E-Mail (Folder Send/Recv): Semiautomatic connection type. In case you use the E-Mail (Folder
Send/Recv) e-mail connection option, you need to set paths to two folders: Send folder (Send path) and
Receive folder (Receive path). Folders are set in the Folder Parameters branch of the connection
parameters tree.
Send folder (Send path) is the folder where data requests are saved as *.xml files. The files have a
predefined name format request_xxxxx.xml (you are not allowed to change request file
names). After a request file is generated and saved, send it as an attachment to an e-mail to
[email protected]. Weather data will be sent to you attached to the response e-mail.

136
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Receive folder (Receive path) is the folder where weather data files received from the data center
should be saved. The ECDIS checks the Receive folder periodically and when the program finds
data files there, it loads the weather package automatically. The loaded weather package is added to
the Weather Packages window.

Figure 119 Setup Connection window, E-Mail (Folder Send/Receive) communication type
E-Mail (Manually via Attachment): Manual connection type. If you use the E-Mail (Manually via
Attachment) e-mail connection option, you will have to send request files and receive and install
weather packages manually. In this case request file is generated when you press the Send Request
button in the Weather Download Request window. Save the file to any location on your computer and
send it as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected]. You will receive a response (e-mail) with
weather package files attached to it. Save the files to any location on your computer. To load the weather
package files, use the Import JWP function in the Weather Packages panel.

NOTE:
When using an e-mail connection, make sure to configure settings correctly. Connection settings
configuration is a one-time job that should be done by an IT-specialist to ensure the right options and
settings are used.

After you set the Internet connection up, you can test it. Testing the connection allows you to see if you have
set it correctly. Testing procedure involves two operations: sending data to the server and receiving data from
the server.

To test the connection with the weather server, do the following:

1. To start testing, go to the Weather Weather Packages panel, press the Settings button and select the
Test Connection option from the drop-down menu. The Test Connection window will open.

137
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 120 Test Connection window
2. Press the Test connection button. Testing operations status is displayed in the Send data and Receive
data fields. Operation statuses can be the following:
N/A no test was started;
Waiting testing of the operation has not started yet;
Testing testing of the operation is being performed at the moment;
Error (error description) an error occurred during testing of the operation, the error description
is given in brackets;
Passed the operation was successfully terminated;
Unknown the operation was not tested;
Failed (failure reason) the operation testing failed due to some reason; the reason of failure is
given in brackets.
3. Testing procedures depend on the communication type set in the Connection setup:
Automatic connection types Internet (HTTP), E-Mail (SMTP/POP3), E-Mail (Inbox via MAPI)
1). Press the Test connection button.
2). Test request will be sent and test response received and downloaded automatically.
3). The procedure may take time, but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed
with your other activities. When you open the Test Connection window next time, you will
see the status of the test.
Semiautomatic connection types E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Test connection button, the test request file will be generated and saved to the Send
folder.
2). Send the test request file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
3). You will receive the test response file in the response e-mail, save the file to the Receive
folder.
4). The ECDIS will load the test file automatically.
5). The procedure may take time, but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed
with your other activities. When you open the Test Connection window next time, you will
see the status of the test.
Manual connection type E-mail (File via Attachment)
1). Press the Test connection button.

138
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 2). Save the generated test request file to any location on your computer.
3). Send the file as an attachment to an e-mail letter to [email protected]. You will receive
the test response file in the response e-mail. Save the response file to any location on your
computer.
4). Download the file to the ECDIS: open the Weather Packages panel (Weather Weather
Packages) and press the Import Weather Data File button. In the Open dialog window,
select the response file and press Open. You will see no indication of data actually being
loaded, but the Receive data operation test will be performed.
5). The procedure may take time, but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed
with your other activities. When you open the Test Connection window next time, you will
see the status of the test.

6.7 Weather Forecast: Display

6.7.1 Turning on and Configuring the Display of Weather Data

Weather data can be displayed in the chart view as an additional data layer. To display the data you should
turn the data display on and configure the data display parameters.

To display the data from a weather data package, do the following:

1. Load a weather data package to the ECDIS (see chapter 6.6, Weather Forecast: Download).
2. In the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Toggle Weather button. This
button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view.
3. In the Weather Weather Packages tab, select the loaded data package in the packages table and
press the Display button. The data will be displayed in the chart view.
4. If you cant see the data, make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather
data.
5. When the display of weather data is on, values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are
displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view.

To turn the display of data from a weather file, do the following:

1. In the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Toggle Weather button. This
button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view. When the button is pressed, the
ECDIS opens *.grb or *.xml files that were opened last.
2. If there were no weather files opened or you need to open different files, use the Open Grib and Open
Cyclones buttons. The Open Grib button opens *.grb files with weather forecasts saved there, and the
Open Cyclone button opens *.xml files with cyclones data.
3. To open a file, press the Open Grib or Open Cyclones button, in the Open dialog select the file to open
and press the Open button. The data from the file will be displayed in the chart view.
4. If you cant see the data, make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather
data.
5. When the display of weather data is on, values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are
displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view.

139
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To configure the display of weather data, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation tab. Using options from this tab, you can turn on/off the
display of weather parameters, select the type of weather symbols (point, line, area), select measurement
units that will be used to display weather parameters, set the time for the display of the weather forecast,
and turn on/off animation of the weather forecast.

Figure 121 Weather Weather Presentation tab

2. To turn on the display of a specified weather parameter in the chart view, tick the checkbox to the left
from the parameter name in the Meteo Parameter column of the Meteo Parameters table. To turn the
display of the parameter off, clear the checkbox.
You can also use options presented in the Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab to turn the display of
weather parameters on/off. To do so, open the Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab and press
buttons with the names of parameters you want to display.

Figure 122 Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, weather parameters buttons
3. The data are displayed using symbols that are described in the legend for every meteorological
parameter. To open the legend of a parameter, select it in the Meteo Parameters table and press the
Legend button.

140
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. To select the type of symbols to be used for the display of a specified weather parameter, in the Meteo
Parameters table, tick checkboxes corresponding to the symbol types for the parameter (the Area, Cont,
Symb, or Text field).
Area: tinting of areas

Figure 123 Display of the wind strength using the Area type symbols
Cont: isolines

Figure 124 Display of the temperature using the Contour type symbols

141
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Symb: point symbols. Vector parameters such as wind are displayed using point symbols showing
the parameter strength and direction. Numeric parameters such as temperature are displayed using
the X symbols plotted in the coordinates of the parameter readings.

Figure 125 Display of the wind strength using the Symbol type symbols
Text: point symbols. Numeric values of parameters are plotted in the coordinates where the
parameters readings were done.

Figure 126 Display of the temperature using the Text type symbols

NOTE:
Some symbol types cannot be used to display specific weather parameters. For example, Contour type
symbols cannot be used to display wind speed and direction or precipitation data. If a symbol type cannot be
used for a weather parameter, it is grayed for that parameter.
All symbol types available for a parameter can be used in the chart view at the same time.

142
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. To select measurement units for the display of a weather parameter, double-click or press the ENTER
key in the Measurement Units field of the weather parameter (when the legend is open, the
Measurement Units column is hidden). The drop-down list with measurement unit options will appear
in the cell. Open the drop-down list and select one of the measurement units.

Figure 127 Selecting measurement units for the wind speed

6. To set the time for which weather data should be displayed, use the time setup tool. You can find the
time setup tool both in the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab and in the Weather
Weather Presentation tab.

Figure 128 Weather Weather Presentation tab, time tool

To set the time, enter the date and time value to the Date field and press the Go button or simply move
the slider of the time scale. Date and time in the Date field change as the slider is being moved.
To change the date and time to the current date and time value, press the Today button.

NOTE:
Weather forecast data received from the weather server are compiled for a certain period of time (the period
is indicated in the data request). You can view the data for any time within this period.

7. To see the weather forecast in dynamics, use the animation buttons: jump to the beginning of the
forecast; one step back (set the step value in the Step drop-down list); start/stop the forecast
animation (the forecast is played from the current position to the end); one step forward; --
jump to the end of the forecast.

143
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 NOTE:
Weather parameters readings were made with a certain time step. The time step for the forecast animation is
set in the Step drop-down list. The set step may differ from the actual parameter readings step. In this case
weather data are interpolated in time. To distinguish the interpolated time step from the original time step,
the font type of interpolated parameters will become italic in the Meteo Parameters window.

6.7.2 Display of Cyclones

Tropical cyclones data that are distributed by the World Meteorological Organization are included as a
separate weather product to the weather data distributed by Jeppesen.

IMPORTANT:

When navigating near a tropical cyclone, update cyclone data regularly and study the information very
carefully.

NOTE:
The dangerous zone is a 50 mile zone near the current cyclone position and the zones around the forecasted
cyclone positions: 100 mile zone for a 24 hour forecast, 150 mile zone for a 48 hour forecast, 200 mile zone
for a 72 hour forecast, and 250 mile zone for a 96 and more hour forecast.

To display cyclones data, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab and press the Cyclones button
or set the Tropical cyclone checkbox in the Weather Weather Presentation tab.
2. The ECDIS will load the last loaded cyclones file. If there was no cyclone files opened or you need to
open a different file, use the Open Cyclones button: press the button, select the cyclones file in the Open
dialog and press the Open button. The cyclones data will be loaded to the ECDIS and displayed in the
chart view.

144
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 129 Weather Weather Presentation tab, display of tropical cyclones

3. The cyclone observed positions are displayed with red-colored symbols ; the forecasted positions are
displayed with white-colored circles . The position of the cyclone at the time set in the time setup tool
in the Weather Weather Presentation tab, is indicated with a yellow-colored circle .
4. When you point with the mouse pointer at one of the cyclone positions, a tool tip appears with the
cyclone name, date and time when the cyclone is expected in the position, wind speed, and wind gust
speed.
5. If there is a route going near the cyclone trajectory, the dangerous route legs will be highlighted with
purple color in the chart view, the same color will be used to indicate the dangerous time for navigating
along the route in the Weather Weather Time Series tab graphs.

6.7.3 Display of Ice Situation

Ice situation data are distributed by Jeppesen as an individual weather product.

IMPORTANT:

Ice situation data are based on the information received from satellites the day before the data are available
for download from the Jeppesen weather server. Therefore the ice situation data can be only used as a
reference and in no way can the data be used to navigate near the ice border or in the ice-covered waters.

Ice concentration and ice coverage data are displayed in the chart view in accordance with the standards of
the WMO.

145
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To display ice situation data, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation tab and tick the Ice concentration checkbox in the Meteo
Parameters table. The data will be displayed in the chart view.

Figure 130 Weather Weather Presentation tab, display of the ice situation
2. The ice situation data received from satellites during one day are compiled into one time period and
provided for the download from the Jeppesen weather server only the next day. That is why the date and
time in the Data field are set automatically to 12 a.m. of the previous day and cannot be changed.

6.7.4 Weather Time Series

In the Weather Time Series panel you can see the evolution of specified weather parameters in a single
point or along a specified route.

IMPORTANT:

To create time series for a specified route, weather data currently downloaded in the ECDIS should cover
the geographical area along which the route goes. The time period of the weather forecast should cover the
time scheduled for navigating along the route (see chapter 6.4.6, Editing Route Schedule).

To create time series for a single point, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Point on Chart option.

146
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. Press the Locate Point on Chart button and plot a point on the chart by left-clicking in the chart view.
The point is highlighted with a yellow ring . The point coordinates are displayed in the Lat and Lon
fields of the Point on Chart section. The coordinates can be edited.
3. Select weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters. To
select a parameter, tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name. To unselect a weather
parameter, clear the checkbox.
4. After the parameters have been checked, the graphs of the parameters development in time will be built
in the graph pane. The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis; vertical axes are different for each
weather parameter and represent the parameters magnitude.
5. When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane, the tool tip is displayed with the exact time in the
pointer position. In the parameters list, the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right
of each parameter. The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow
vertical line.

Figure 131 Weather Weather Time Series tab, time series for a point
6. To export weather data for the selected point to a *.csv file, press the Export button, indicate the file
name and folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog, and press the Save button.
7. To print the graph out, press the Print button, the graph will be automatically saved to a *.jpg file and
opened with your default image processing program. Print the graph out using the printing functionality
of the program.

To create time series for a route, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Route option. The list of all
available routes will appear in the Select Route pane below.
2. Select one of the routes in the Select Route pane.
3. Select weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters. To
select a parameter, tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name. To unselect a weather
parameter, clear the checkbox.
4. After the parameters have been checked, the graphs of the parameters development in time along the
route will be built in the graph pane. A point on a parameter graph shows the value of the parameter at a
specified time for the point on the route where the own ship is supposed to be at that time.
The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis; vertical axes are different for each weather parameter
and represent the parameters magnitude.
147
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane, the tool tip is displayed with the exact time in the
pointer position. In the parameters list, the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right
of each parameter. The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow
vertical line.

Figure 132 Weather Weather Time Series tab, time series for a route
6. To export weather data for the route to a *.csv file, press the Export button, indicate the name of the
file and the folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog, and press the Save button.
7. To print the graph, press the Print button, the graph will be automatically saved to a *.jpg file and
opened with your default image processing program. Print the graph out using the printing functionality
of the program.

6.7.5 Weather Alarm Area

In the Weather Weather Alarm Area tab you can set alarm thresholds for weather forecast parameters
and the ECDIS will display areas where values of parameters exceed the set thresholds as alarm areas on the
chart.

To set a weather alarm condition, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Weather Alarm Area tab and press the Add condition button to create a new
line in the alarms table.
2. Double-click in the Met Parameter field to open the drop-down list with weather parameters. Select a
parameter from the drop-down list.

Figure 133 Weather Weather Alarm Area tab, adding a new alarm condition
148
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. Double-click in the Value of field to open the drop-down list of attributes of the specified weather
parameter. Select an attribute from the drop-down list.
4. Double-click in the Value from field and enter the value of the lower limit of the condition; double-click
in the Value to field and enter the value of the upper limit.
5. Repeat the actions for other alarm conditions if necessary. To combine several alarm conditions, use
operations available in the Operation drop-down list. The drop-down list appears after the next alarm
condition has been added. The following operations are available:
AND alarm area will be made for areas where both conditions are true
OR alarm area will be made for areas where at least one of the conditions is true
6. To delete a condition select it in the table and press the Delete button. To delete all conditions from the
table press the Delete All button.
7. To move a condition up or down in the table, select it and press the Move up or Move down button
respectively.
8. To save the current conditions set to a file press the Save button, in the Save as dialog indicate the folder
and the name of the conditions file and press Save. The conditions set will be saved to an *.xml file. To
load a previously saved conditions set press the Load button, in the Open dialog select the file with the
conditions and press Open. The conditions will be loaded and displayed in the Weather Alarm Area
panel.

To display alarm areas in the chart view, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Weather Presentation tab.
2. Find the Alarm zone entry in the Meteo Parameter column and tick the checkbox to the left from the
entry.

6.7.6 Comparison of Routes

Alarm areas can be used to compare two routes and select the one which is safer.

To compare routes, do the following:

1. Create two or more routes (see chapter 6.4, Route Planning and Plotting). Display the routes in the chart
view.
2. Download weather data for the region covering the routes. It is important that the time period of the
weather forecast cover the time scheduled for navigating along the routes.
3. Set alarm conditions in the Weather Weather Alarm Area tab (see chapter 6.7.5, Weather Alarm
Area). The routes will be colored depending on whether they go inside or outside the alarm areas.
4. In the Weather Weather Presentation tab, in the time setup tool, set the time scheduled for
navigation along the route. A symbol of the own ship will appear on the route in the position where the
ship is supposed to be at the indicated time (if there are several routes displayed in the chart view, the
symbol of the own ship will appear on all the routes). Weather forecast parameters will be displayed for
the indicated time.
The legs of the routes will be highlighted with red if they are dangerous in terms of the alarm conditions;
green if the legs are safe; and blue of there is a danger of capsizing for the ship following under given
weather conditions and with the planned speed along the legs.

149
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. The navigation along the routes is imitated by dragging the own ship symbol from one waypoint to
another using the mouse pointer. When the ship symbol is moved, the time changes to the time at which
the ship is scheduled to reach the new position. The weather forecast changes together with the time. The
own ship symbols on other routes are moved too.
When dragged along the route, the own ship symbol can be moved for a distance the ship would make in
the time interval set in the Step field in the Weather Weather Presentation tab. To move the own
ship symbol along the route, you can also use the animation buttons of the time setup tool.

Figure 134 Weather Weather Time Series tab, routes comparison

6.7.7 Inspect Ship Position

The Inspect Ship Position function allows assessing a specified position of your ship on the route in terms
of weather conditions. To assess a ship position you need the time of weather forecast to be the same as the
time at which the vessel will reach the specified position (route schedule).

To asses the ship position on the route, do the following:

1. Display a route in the chart view.
2. Download weather data for the region covering the route (see chapter 6.6, Weather Forecast:
Download).
3. Make sure that the time period of the weather forecast covers the time scheduled for navigating along the
route.
4. Set the own ship parameters in the Ship Response dialog. To open the dialog, in the Weather
Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Ship Response Options button (details about the
Ship Response Options dialog see below).

150
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. Set the time of the weather forecast display in the time setup tool of the Weather Weather
Presentation (Easy Mode) tab. The time should be within the period of time scheduled for navigating
along the route (Route Route Planning tab, edit mode, Schedule table). The own ship symbol will
appear on the route at the position where the own ship is supposed to be at the indicated time (the
position is calculated using the route schedule data and the own ship planned speed).
To change time schedule of the route go to the Route Route Planning panel, select the route you
intend to check in the Routes table, switch to the edit mode (the Edit button), and in the Schedule tab
change the ETD (estimated time of departure) value so that the time period scheduled for navigating
along the route overlapped with the time period for which you have weather data. Once this done, a ship
symbol will appear on the route. Now you can view the results of operation of the Inspect Ship Position
function.
6. If there are several routes and the time set in the Weather Weather Presentation tab for the weather
forecast display falls within the time period scheduled for navigating on the routes, the own ship symbol
will appear on these routes too. To select an own ship symbol, left-click on it. The active own ship
symbol will become red.

Figure 135 Non- Figure 136 Selected

selected own ship own ship symbol
symbol

7. Open the Inspect Ship Position panel where the result of the analysis of the current own ship position
for the weather conditions at the given time is displayed. To open the Inspect Ship Position panel, press
the Inspect Ship Pos button in the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab.
8. To change the time for the evaluation of the own ship position, move the time slider of the time setup
tool in the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab or drag the own ship symbol along the
route (left-click on the symbol and, holding the mouse button). Time can be changed by the step set in
the Step field in the time setup tool in the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab.

151
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To read the Inspect Ship Position panel, you need the following information:
1. The Inspect Ship Position panel consists of two parts: the informational part and the polar diagram part.
2. In the informational part you can see the following data:
Date and time of the ship position in the upper part of the
panel.
Coordinates of the ship position in the upper part of the panel.
Roll, pitch and heave values (estimated using the swell and total
waves data) in the lower part, the left column.
Weather parameters (values of those weather parameters are
displayed that are checked in the Weather Weather
Presentation tab in the Meteo. Parameters table).
You can also see presentation of such weather parameters as total
sea, swell and wind as special symbols. The parameters are
represented as colored arrows in three corners of the panel:
The dark blue arrow in the upper left corner represents the
direction and period of total sea. Figure 137 Inspect Ship
The blue arrow in the lower left corner represents the Position panel
direction and the period of the swell.
The red arrow in the upper right corner represents the direction and velocity of the wind.
To read values of the weather parameters represented by the arrows, see corresponding weather
legends in the Weather Weather Presentation tab (to open a weather legend relating to a
weather parameter, select the weather parameter in the Meteo. Parameters table and the
corresponding weather legend will be displayed in the Weather Legend part of the tab).
3. The polar diagram gives you information about the speed and course of the vessel in a specified position
on the route as well as about the speed and course values combinations that can cause a risk of a sudden
increase in roll amplitude. The diagram consists of the following elements:
Concentric circular axes representing vessel speed.
The vessel symbol plotted in the middle of the diagram.
The vessel speed and direction vector (the arrow pointing outward from the center of the vessel
symbol) shows the direction and velocity of the vessel. The direction is the angle between the
imaginary vertical axis of the diagram and the vessel speed and direction vector measured
horizontally from North to whatever direction you are pointing. The vessel speed is defined with the
help of concentric axes representing speed the value of the speed lies in the point where the vector
ends. Speed of the vessel in the current position is taken from the route characteristics (speed on the
leg).
The Danger (red shadow) zone covers all points representing combination of speed and course at
which there is a danger of having a sudden increase in roll amplitude of the vessel (if the vessel
speed and direction vector end lies within the red shadow zone, the vessel is in danger of capsizing).
The conclusion is made from comparison of the vessel natural roll period with the relative wave
period: if the difference between values is less than 30% the resonance can occur. This
combination can in some cases be dangerous. An alarm for a given threshold of roll amplitude can
be made in the Weather Alarm Area panel.

152
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 NOTE:
The Inspect Ship Position function operates with specific ship dimensions and other parameters. The
parameters are set using the Ship Response Options setup tool.

To set ship parameters for the Ship Response analysis, do the following:
1. In the Weather Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Ship Response Options

button. The Ship Response dialog will open.

Figure 138 Ship Response window

2. Set the required parameters:
Ship Data section
Length Length at waterline (LWL) of the vessel, meters. LWL is the length of the vessel as
measured from the bow ending of the waterline to the stern ending.
Width Beam (the widest width) of the vessel, meters.
Draft Draft of the vessel, meters.
Load Displacement Displacement of the vessel, tons.
Additional parameters section
Angle of vanishing stability Sets angle of vanishing stability (AVS) of the vessel, degrees.
AVS is the angle the boat can heel and still right itself.
Waterline area coefficient Waterline area coefficient, non-dimensional quantity.
Effective waterline area Effective waterline area, square meters.
Transverse metacentric height Transverse metacentric height of the vessel, meters.
Transverse metacentric height is the vertical separation of the center of gravity and the
transverse metacenter.
3. Check the Enable ship response calculation checkbox so that the Danger zone was calculated and
displayed in the Inspect Ship Position panel.
4. Check the Show alarm of resonance condition checkbox to enable the alarm in case a resonance
condition occurs during navigation along the route.

153
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. You can save a set of parameters to a file in order to use them later. To save parameters press the Save
button, in the Save as dialog indicate the location and name of the file and press Save. The set of ship
response parameters will be saved to an *.xml file.
6. To load previously saved sets of parameters press the Load button, in the Open dialog select the file
with parameters and press Open. The parameters will be loaded and displayed in the corresponding
fields of the Ship Response window.
7. To save changed parameters and close the Ship Response window, press OK. To close the window
without saving changes press Cancel.

6.8 Piracy Information

Use information about pirate assaults to plan your route. Piracy information is now available in ECDIS as a
database supplementary section.

The piracy information section provides the following data:

name, type and flag state of assaulted vessels
date and location of incidents
description of incidents
URL of the internet site providing additional information about incidents
note on the latest piracy incidents

NOTE:
The Piracy Information supplementary section requires separate licensing.

To access the Piracy Information supplementary section, you have to install a license for the data. A piracy
information license is installed the same way as a data set or area license. Licenses are installed in the Data
Licensing tab. For more details, see chapter 4.2, Licensing Data.
After the license has been installed, turn on the display of the Piracy Information supplementary section. Go
to the Chart Chart Settings tab, select the current database in the Supplementary Chart Info section
and check the Piracy Information data section. For more details, see chapter5.6.3, Supplementary Data.
There are two types of piracy information objects: a point Piracy Attempt object (a skull and cross bones
symbol ) and an area Piracy Note object. To get information about a piracy object, right-click it and find
the object in the Object Information tab that will open.

NOTE:
To select a Piracy Attempt object place the mouse pointer exactly in the point where bones cross.

The following types of Piracy Attempt objects exist:

Hijack marked with a red skull and cross bones symbol

Armed robbery/Armed assault marked with an orange skull and cross bones symbol

154
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Attempted boarding marked with a blue skull and cross bones symbol

Suspicious approach marked with a green skull and cross bones symbol

155
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7. NAVIGATION
7.1 Own Ship Position and Passed Track
Position of the own ship can be monitored in the chart view. The own ship symbol is displayed in the chart
view in coordinates coming from the primary position source.
The elements of the own ship presentation in the chart view include the own ship symbol, the prediction
vector, and the passed track.

Figure 139 Own ship position and vectors, and passed track presentation

To configure the display of the own ship in the chart view, do the following:
1. Set the primary and secondary position sources in the Navi Navigation Data tab, the Position Source
section (see chapter 7.2, Position Sources).
2. Open the Navi Own Ship past track and vector tab. In this tab you can configure the display of the
own ship passed track and prediction vectors.

Figure 140 Config System tab, Own Ship tab

3. To start drawing the own ship passed track, the track based on positioning data from the primary position
source, tick the Past track checkbox in the Past track section. The passed track will be displayed in the
chart view. The passed track is updated at the interval set in the Display every field. To set an interval,
select a value in the Display every drop-down list.

156
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. To hide the past track, clear the Past track checkbox. The passed track is removed from the display but
is not deleted. To display the hidden passed track again, check the Past track checkbox.
5. To delete the old passed track and start drawing the new passed track, check the Past track checkbox
and press the Reset button. The old passed track will be deleted and the new one will start to be drawn.
6. To delete the past track and stop drawing the past track altogether, clear the Past track checkbox and
press the Reset button. The old passed track will be deleted.
7. You can also display the own ship secondary passed track, the track based on positioning data from the
secondary positioning device. Settings for the secondary passed track are presented in the Secondary
past track section and are the same as the settings for the primary position source passed track.
8. To turn on the display of time labels on the own ship passed track, check the Time labels checkbox in
the Past track section. To turn the display of time labels off, clear the Time labels checkbox. Select a
time labels display step in the Set every drop-down list.
9. In the Own ship vector section you can configure properties of the ship velocity vectors. To predict the
ship position over a period of time three vectors are used:
Ground stabilized vector vector based on SOG (speed over ground) and COG (course over
ground) values (the black dotted line with one minute graduation
marks and a double arrow end). To display this vector, check the
Ground stabilized vector checkbox.
Water stabilized vector vector based on STW (speed through
water) and HDG (heading) values (the black dotted line with no
graduation marks and a single arrow end). To display this vector,
check the Water stabilized vector checkbox. Figure 141 Velocity vectors

Prediction vector vector based on STW, HDG and ROT (rate of turn) values (the red line with a
single arrow end). To display this vector, check the Prediction vector checkbox.
To set the time period for the ship position prediction, select a value from the Vector length drop-down
list. (e.g. if it is set to 6 minutes, the vector length will show how far the vessel will get in 6 minutes with
the current speed).
10. To be able to evaluate the ability of the own ship to pass a narrow place (through a lock, under a bridge,
etc.), the Sight lines function is used. The Sight lines function turns on the display of the passage
corridor of the own ship. You can see the passage corridor at the chart
scale at which the own ship symbol is shown as a scaled area symbol
and larger. If the own ship symbol is shown as a point symbol, the ship
passage corridor is not displayed.
The width of the passage corridor depends on the course over the
ground (COG) and heading (HDG) of the ship. If the COG and HDG
values are the same, the width of the own ship passage corridor equals
the maximum beam of the ship set in the Config Own Ship tab. If
the COG and the HDG values are different the width of the own ship
passage corridor is more than the maximum beam. The width of the Figure 142 Own ship
own ship passage corridor is shown on the chart near the end of the passage corridor
passage corridor symbol. (Beam=10m, Length=40m)

NOTE:
If any of the prediction vectors is not displayed, make sure that the required data (SOG, COG, STW, HDG,

157
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
ROT) are coming to the ECDIS from input devices.

To display the own ship symbol using the secondary position source, do the following:
Open the Navi Navigation Data tab and check the Show secondary checkbox in the Position Source
section.

To display the own ship symbol as a scaled area symbol, do the following:
1. Open the Navi Navigation Data tab and check the True scale ship image checkbox.
2. The own ship point symbol will turn into an area symbol at large scales. The scale at which the
transformation happens depends on overall dimensions of the own ship set in the Config Own Ship
Own ship setup tab.

7.2 Position Sources

7.2.1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources

In the ECDIS, you can use two ways to position the own ship:
One or more GPS devices (DGPS, WAAS/EGNOS, etc.), compatible with the NMEA interface.
GPS devices used for positioning should be registered in the ECDIS (see chapter 3.1, Input/Output).
Dead reckoning (see chapter 7.2.2, Dead Reckoning).
Several positioning devices can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time. One of the devices is used as a
primary position source and one as a secondary position source. Both the own ship position defined with the
primary positioning device and that defined with the secondary positioning device can be displayed in the
chart view (see chapter 7.1, Own Ship Position and Passed Track). Using the display of both primary and
secondary positions of the own ship, you can monitor the reliability of various positioning devices.

To set a positioning device as a primary or a secondary position source, do the following:

1. Make sure that the positioning device you want to set as a primary or secondary position source is
connected to the ECIDS and registered in the Config Input/Output tab (see chapter 3.1,
Input/Output).
2. Open the Navi Navigation Data tab. Position sources are configured in the Position sources tab. All
positioning devices that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the Secondary
position source drop-down list, dead reckoning (DR) is also on the list though it is not an external input
device.

158
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 143 Navi Navigation Data tab, Position Source section
3. You can also set position sources in the Position, Heading and Data sources panel. To open the panel
left-click on the Position Source indicator. Open the Position sources tab. This tab is the same as the
Position sources tab in the Navi Navigation Data tab, and all actions in one are immediately
repeated in the other.

Figure 144 Position sources tab

4. In case the positioning device you want to set as a primary position source is already set so, there is no
need to change anything. If the positioning device is not set as a primary position source, select it in the
Secondary position source drop-down list and press the Swap position sources button. The name of the
primary position source is displayed in the Position Source indicator (see chapter 2.3, Indicators Panel).

NOTE:
The DR cannot be set as a primary position source this way. It is used for positioning only in case there is no
any data available from external positioning devices.

159
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. To set a positioning device as a secondary position source, just select it in the list of available positioning
devices in the Position sources tab. To display the own ship position in the chart view using the
secondary position source, check the Show secondary checkbox.
6. In case the primary position source fails, an alarm is triggered (see chapter 7.6, Alarms) and the
secondary position source becomes the primary source automatically.

7.2.2 Dead Reckoning

The dead reckoning parameters can be used for the own ship positioning when communication with all other
positioning devices is lost.

To use dead reckoning as position source, do the following:

1. Open the Navi Dead reckoning tab. The Position, Heading, and Speed parameters are automatically
set to the values that were last received from external output devices.

Figure 145 Config Dead reckoning tab

2. To change the automatically set parameters, clear the Auto/Manual checkbox of the parameter that you
are going to change and enter a new value to the edit field.
3. Enter the drift direction and speed to the Drift direction and Drift speed fields.
4. After all necessary changes have been done, press the Apply button for the parameters to take effect.

160
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.2.3 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs
The Manual Position Fix function is intended for fixing of the own ship position using range and bearing
lines of position taken from visual or radar detected reference objects. Description of the function algorithm
and examples of the manual position task are presented in the Appendix D.
To use the Manual Position Fix function, open the Navi LOP Position fix tab.

Figure 146 Navi LOP Position Fix tab

To complete the manual position fix task, the following operations should be performed:
1. Plotting reference points in the chart view.
2. Entering results of measuring bearings and ranges to the reference.
3. Calculating the position.
4. Accepting the calculated position as the new own ship position.
5. Additional parameters configuration is available: corrections for constant errors of measuring devices.

To plot reference points in the chart view, do the following:

1. Press the Select reference point button to switch to the object selection mode.
2. In the chart view, point the mouse pointer at the observed object and right-click on it. The window with
the list of all objects under the pointer will open.

NOTE:
Reference point plotting is only possible if the Navi Manual Observation tab is open and the Select
reference point button is pressed. If any other or no tab is open, right-clicking in the chart view opens the
Object Info panel.

161
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. In the objects list find the observed object and double-click on it to select. The Would you like to name
the reference point? window will open where you can enter the reference point name.

Figure 147 List of objects under the mouse pointer

NOTE:
If the reference point is a point on land, select the Land area or the Coastline object, and the reference point
symbol will be plotted in the position of the mouse pointer on the land or at the coast line.

4. Enter the reference point name in the Would you like to name the observation point? field and press
the OK button. You may leave the point without a name, just press the OK button and press Yes in the
You did not give a name to the reference point. Would you like to proceed anyway? message window.

5. The reference point will be added to the Reference points list and a reference point symbol
will be displayed in the chart view.
6. The point coordinates are displayed in the Position fields below the Observation table. To change the
reference point position, type in new coordinate values and press the Change button. The reference point
will be moved to the new coordinates.
7. In the Reference points list, you can move points up and down: select a point and press the Up button to
move the point up in the list or Down button to move the point down in the list. To remove a point, select
it in the list and press the Remove button. To remove all points, press the Remove All button.

Figure 148 Navi Manual Observation tab, Observation Points list

162
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To enter observation results, do the following:
1. The observation data are entered to the Observation table. To enter the data for a reference point, select
the point in the Reference points list. Now you can start entering distance and bearing data to the
Observation table.

Figure 149 Navi LOP Position fix tab, entering observation data
2. To enter the distance to the observed point, double-click in the Distance field to make the field editable
and enter the distance value. The measurement units are set in the Config Units and Time tab.
3. To enter the bearing from the own ship to the point, double-click in the Bearing field to make it editable
and enter the bearing value.
4. To set the observation time, double-click in the Fix time field: the current time will be displayed. Correct
the time value so that it corresponded to the observation time if necessary.

NOTE:
If the time is not set, position calculation is impossible. The Calculate button remains dimmed.

5. To specify the device used to make the observation, double-click in the Tool field to make it editable and
select the device from the devices drop-down list. Depending on the specified device the error correction
for the device is used in the position calculation.

NOTE:
The type of position fix you are using defines which fields of the observation entry should be filled. For
example, for a fix by bearings, Bearing, Fix time, and Tool fields should be filled; and for a fix by ranges,
only Distance, Fix time, and Tool fields should be filled.

163
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6. To add an additional observation for a reference point, select the point in the Reference points list and
press the Add button to the right from the Observation table: a new observation line will be added to the
table. You can enter observation data to the new line.
7. To remove an observation, select it in the Observation table and press the Remove button to the right
from the table.
8. After the observation data have been entered, the line of position (LOP) built using the data is plotted in
the chart view with the time of observation displayed on the line. LOPs with different observation time
are advanced to the time of the latest observed LOP. When advancing a LOP, the own ship course
changes, speed changes, and set and drift between the two lines are accounted for. Advanced LOPs are
marked with a TPL mark.

Figure 150 LOP: Range Figure 151 LOP: Figure 152 LOP:
Arc Bearing Line advanced bearing line

164
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To calculate the observed position, do the following:
1. To calculate the own ship position, press the Calculate button. The position will be calculated and

plotted in the chart view as a symbol. The position coordinates and the position offset from the
current DR position of the own ship are displayed in the Result pane of the Navi LOP Position fix
tab.

Figure 153 Calculated position in the chart view and in the Result section
2. The coordinates of the manual position fix are displayed in the Position section of the Result pane. The
Discrepancy pane displays offset of the manual position fix from the current DR position of the own
ship: distance from the own ship to the manual fix in the Distance field, bearing from the own ship to the
manual fix in the Bearing field, and the root mean square error of the position fix in the RMS field. The
RMS error is displayed in the chart view as an RMS error ellipse.

Figure 154 RMS error ellipse

165
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To accept the observed position, do the following:
1. To accept the position fix as a new DR position of the own ship, press the Accept Position button. The
own ship symbol will be moved to the fix and the DR will resume positioning of the own ship from the
fix. If the dead reckoning is off, the own ship is not moved to the manual fix.
2. After the manual fix has been accepted, the manual fix symbol is displayed in the chart view with the
time and means of observation:
V the fix was made using visual bearings
R the fix was made using radar ranges
VR the fix was made using both visual bearings and radar ranges
3. At the moment when the manual fix is accepted, an entry about it is added to the logbook. The manual
fix entry may look as follows:

Figure 155 Log Book panel, manual fix entries

NOTE:
Before the start of a new manual position fix operation, clear all previous observations (only if the
observations are not to be used in this operation). To do so, press the Remove All button to the right from
the Observations table.

166
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To configure additional manual position fix parameters, do the following:
1. Open the MODevices.config.xml file where you can enter values of RMS and fixed corrections for
observation devices. To do so, open the Config Own ship Position of instruments tab and press
the LOP Position fix adv. parameters button. The Editing of LOP Position fix function advanced
parameters. Do you wish to continue? message will appear. Press Yes, the
MODevices.config.xml file will open for editing in the LOP Position fix advanced parameters
window.
2. Edit the file directly in the window. To save the changes, press the Save button; to reset the file to its
initial contents, press the Reset button. To close the window, press the Close button

Figure 156 LOP Position fix advanced parameters window

167
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. To edit the LOP Position fix advanced parameters, enter new values to the <value> fields of
appropriate settings without changing the structure of the MODevices.config.xml file. In the table
below sections and settings of the file are described:

Section Setting Default Description

Value

DRActualisation SogRMS 0.1 Speed over ground root mean square error
(RMSE), in knots.

Radar BrgRMS 0.3 Radar bearing RMSE, in degrees.

BrgCorrection 0.0 Radar bearing constant correction, in degrees.

DistRMS 3.75 Radar distance RMSE, in nautical miles.

DistCorrection 0.0 Radar distance constant correction, in

nautical miles.

DirFinder 1 BrgRMS 0.1 Port direction finder bearing RMSE, in

degrees.

BrgCorrection 0.0 Port direction finder bearing constant

correction, in degrees.

DirFinder 2 BrgRMS 0.1 Starboard direction finder bearing RMSE, in

degrees.

BrgCorrection 0.0 Starboard direction finder bearing constant

correction, in degrees.

4. After the file has been edited, save it (press the Save button) and close it (press the Close button).

7.2.4 Position Correction

In case the currently used positioning device provides coordinates in a coordinates system different from the
chart coordinates system, a position correction is required. For example, the positioning device provides
coordinates in the S-42 coordinates system (for plotting the own ship on a paper chart), and the electronic
chart is made in the WGS-84 coordinates systems (usually all digital charts are made in the WGS-84
system): in this case, the own ship position in the chart view is incorrect. A coordinates correction should be
provided to the ECDIS to display the own ship symbol in the correct position.
The coordinates system of the positioning device is set in the device itself; the electronic chart coordinates
system is displayed in the navigational panel (see chapter 7.7.2, Route Monitoring Panel).
If the positioning device and the chart have different coordinates systems, a position correction should be
introduced.

IMPORTANT:

The position correction is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password.

168
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To introduce a position correction, do the following:
1. Open the Navi Navigation Data tab. The position correction values are
entered in the Position Corrections section.
2. Enter the correction for the latitude to the Lat field and the correction for the
longitude to the Lon field. To add the correction value to the coordinate,
enter the plus + sign in front of the value; to subtract the correction value,
enter the minus - sign in front of the value. Figure 157 Position
3. After the correction has been entered or changed, press the Apply Enter the Correction section
password to the Password required dialog and press the OK button.
4. The corrections are applied to the coordinates received from the positioning device and displayed in the
navigational panel. The corrections are indicated with the plus + and minus - signs depending on the
sign of the correction.

NOTE:
Positioning devices can transmit the DTM sentence in the NMEA format. This sentence contains indication
of the coordinates system of the device. In this case check the DTM sentence checkbox when registering the
device in the ECDIS. With the DTM sentence, the ECDIS receives the position correction automatically and
you dont have to enter it manually.

7.2.5 Position Discrepancies

When the own ship position is defined using more than one method, there can be
discrepancies between position values. The discrepancies are displayed in the
Navi Navigation Data tab, Position discrepancies section:
Primary/Secondary discrepancy between positions coming from
primary and secondary position sources (displayed if the Show Figure 158 Position
secondary checkbox in the Navi Navigation Data Position discrepancies
sources tab is checked);
Primary/Manual discrepancy between positions defined by primary position source and by
manual observation (LOP position fix).

7.3 Heading Sources

In the ECDIS, you can use two ways to get the own ship heading:
One or more external devices providing heading information, compatible with the NMEA interface.
The devices should be registered in the ECDIS.
Dead reckoning (see chapter 7.2.2, Dead Reckoning).
Several devices providing the own ship heading data can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time. One
of the devices is used as a primary heading source and one as a secondary heading source.

To set a device as a primary or a secondary heading source, do the following:

1. Make sure that the device you want to set as a primary or secondary heading source is connected to the
ECIDS and registered in the Config Input/Output tab.

169
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. Open the Navi Navigation Data tab. Heading sources are configured in the Heading sources section.
All devices providing heading that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the
available heading devices list, dead reckoning (DR) is also on the list though it is not an external input
device.

Figure 159 Navi Navigation Data tab, Position Source section

3. You can also set heading sources in the Position, Heading and Data sources panel. To open the panel
left-click on the Position Source indicator. Open the Heading sources tab. This tab is the same as the
Heading sources tab in the Navi Navigation Data, and all actions in one are immediately repeated in
the other.

Figure 160 Heading sources tab

4. In case the device you want to set as a primary heading source is already set so, there is no need to
change anything. If this device is not set as a primary position source, select it in the Secondary heading
source drop-down list of available devices and press the Swap heading sources button. The name of the
primary heading source is displayed in the heading line of the Navigational panel.

NOTE:
The DR cannot be set as a primary heading source this way. It is used as a heading source only in case there
is no any data available from external devices.

170
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. To set a device as a secondary heading source, just select it in the Secondary heading source drop-down
list in the Heading sources tab.
6. In case the primary heading source fails, an alarm is triggered (see chapter 7.6, Alarms) and the
secondary heading source becomes the primary source automatically.

7.4 Navigational Data Display and Sources

7.4.1 Navigational Panel

Information about the own ship position, current speed and course and other navigational data coming from
external devices registered in the Config Input/Output tab, is displayed in the Navigational panel in the
upper right corner of the screen.

In the Navigational panel, the following data are displayed:

SHIP The local (ship) time and date. To display the UTC time, left-click on the date and time line
and hold the mouse button. When the button is released, the local time is displayed again. The offset
between the local and the UTC time is set in the Config Units and Time tab.
Position source indicator The position source indicator shows which position source is being
currently used to define the own ship position (see chapter 7.2, Position
Sources). If the primary position source is used, the indicator is green; if
the secondary position source is used, the indicator is orange. In the
brackets near the device name reference position is indicated (CCRP
conning station; POS the positioning device itself).
Own ship coordinates Latitude and longitude of the own ship
received from the positioning device. The AUTO mark near the
coordinates indicates that the position is received from an external
positioning device.
SOG Speed over ground received from the positioning device.
COG Course over ground received from the positioning device.
HDG Heading received from the gyrocompass. Near the heading
value the name of the device providing heading info is indicated. If
heading is received from dead reckoning, the MAN mark is displayed. Figure 161
Navigational panel
STW Speed through water received from the log.
DPT Depth received from the echo sounder. The value is the depth from the transducer to the sea
bottom. The DPT line is not on the panel if no echo sounder is registered in the Config
Input/Output tab.
Wind Wind speed and direction received from the wind sensor. The Wind line is not on the panel
if no wind sensor is registered in the Config Input/Output tab. The Disp. button opens the
Anemometer window where the true and relative wind directions are depicted graphically.
ROT Rate of turn received from the gyrocompass. The ROT line is not on the panel if no
gyrocompass is registered in the Config Input/Output tab.

171
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 5951 WGS 84 The number of the source chart for the chart under the own ship or under the
chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage and the chart coordinates system. In the frame
lower, the suitability indicator is displayed. The indicator shows if the chart under the own ship (or
under the chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage) is suitable for navigation.

NOTE:
The indicators color means the following:

Green the values are received from the primary positioning device and other external
devices;

Orange the values are received from the secondary positioning device.

Red the external device providing the data fails and no data is coming to the ECDIS.

7.4.2 Navigational Data Sources

The same navigational data can come from various external devices. In ECDIS
only one source of data can be used.

To view navigational data sources, do the following:

1. Left-click on the Position Source indicator in the Navigational panel. The
Position, Heading and Data sources panel will open.
2. Open the Data sources tab. The list with navigational data in the left column
and their sources in the right is displayed in the tab.
Figure 162 Position
3. To close the panel, press the Close button in the upper right corner of the
and Data sources
panel.
panel, Data sources
tab
7.4.3 Wind Sensor Data
If a wind sensor is connected to the system and registered in it, a Wind entry is displayed in the
Navigational panel. In the entry data coming from the wind sensor are displayed. Wind direction can also be
presented in a graphical form.

To view the graphical representation of the wind direction, do the following:

1. Press the Disp. button in the Wind entry of the Navigational panel. The Anemometer window will
open. In the window you can see the true and relative wind direction display.
2. To switch to the true wind direction display, press the True button.

172
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. To switch to the Relative wind direction display, press the Relative button.

Figure 163 Anemometer, true wind Figure 164 Anemometer, relative wind

(STW=10kn, HDG=0, relative wind speed=5kn, relative wind direction=225)

4. To drag the Anemometer window to a different position, move the pointer to the title bar, press the left
mouse button and drag the window to a new position holding the button.
5. To close the window, press the Close button in the upper right corner of the window.

NOTE:
The true wind is wind relative to a fixed point on the earth.
The relative or apparent wind is the speed and true direction from which the wind appears to blow with
reference to a moving point.

7.5 Navigational Chart Settings

7.5.1 Navigation Mode

When in the navigation mode, the ECDIS monitors the own ship position and moves the chart so that the
own ship stayed in the chart view.
The navigation mode status is indicated with the Navigation mode indicator (see chapter 2.3, Indicators
Panel): when the navigation mode is on, the indicator is green, when the navigation mode is off, the indicator
is orange.

To turn the navigation mode on/off, do the following:

1. To turn the navigation mode on, left-click on the Navigation mode indicator. The indicator should
become green . The chart view is scrolled so that to display the own ship symbol in the chart
view.
2. To turn the navigation mode off, left-click on the Navigation mode indicator. The indicator should
become orange . The navigation mode turns off if you left-click in the chart view while the
navigation mode is on.

173
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.5.2 Best Scale Mode
When in the best scale mode, the ECDIS displays the chart with the largest scale existing for the given
region. The best scale mode works only together with the navigation mode.

To turn the best scale mode on/off, do the following:

1. To turn the best scale mode on, left-click on the Scale state indicator (see chapter 2.3, Indicators Panel).
The indicator should become green and the indicator label should change to the Best scale; in the chart
view the chart with the best scale will be displayed.
2. You can also turn the best scale mode on by ticking the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and
Quick Access Buttons panel.
3. To turn the best scale mode off, left-click on the Scale state indicator. The indicator should become
orange.
4. You can also turn the best scale mode off by clearing the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and
Quick Access Buttons panel.

7.5.3 Chart Display Palettes

The ECDIS implements three color palettes. The palettes are set to provide better conditions for viewing
charts under various illumination conditions. The palettes are:

Figure 165 Day palette Figure 166 Dusk palette Figure 167 Night palette

To set one of the palettes, do the following:

1. Open the Config System tab.

Figure 168 Config System tab, Display palettes

174
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. In the Display palettes section, select one of the palettes. The selected palette will be applied to the chart
view immediately.

NOTE:
To switch between the night and the day palettes, press the F12 key.

7.5.4 Chart Orientation

The chart view can be oriented to the true North up, to the own ship course up, or to the route up.

To set the chart view orientation, do the following:

1. Open the Navi Navigation Data tab.
2. In the Chart Orientation section select one of the four orientation options:
a. To orient the chart to the North up, press the North Up button. The chart
will be oriented to the North up. This option is available in all modes.
b. To orient the chart to the own ship course up, press the Course Up button.
The chart will be oriented to the own ship course up. This option is only
available if the Navigation mode is on. Figure 169 Navi
Navigation Data
c. To orient the chart to the own ship heading up, press the Heading Up tab, Chart
button. The chart will be oriented to the own ship heading up. This option Orientation section
is only available if the Navigation mode is on.
d. To orient the chart to the route up, press the Route Up button. The chart will be oriented to the
route which is being monitored. This option is only available is the Route Monitoring mode is on.

7.5.5 True and Relative Motion

There are two motion modes for the chart display: true motion mode and relative motion mode. In the true
motion mode, the own ship symbol moves across the chart view and the chart stays in the same position. As
soon as the own ship reaches a predefined distance from the chart view center, the chart is redrawn and the
ship symbol is moved to the initial position in the chart view.
In the relative motion mode, the own ship symbol stays in the same position in the chart view, and the chart
moves as the own ship position changes.

NOTE:
Both true motion and relative motion modes work only together with the navigation mode on.

To turn on and setup the true motion mode, do the following:

175
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
1. In the Navi Navigation Data tab, press the True button in the Ship motion
mode section. In the true motion mode the chart is stationary and the own ship
symbol is moving. When the ship reaches a pre-defined point inside the chart
view, it "jumps" backwards and the chart is redrawn.
The own ship redraw area in the True motion mode is defined automatically. Figure 170 Navi
However, you can set your own ship redraw area using the Ship Redraw Area Navigation Data tab,
function. Ship Motion Mode
section
2. To set a new ship redraw area, press the Set button in the Ship Redraw Area
section. An initial pre-defined redraw area will appear in the chart view. The
area is indicated with a green internal and a red external boundary circles.
3. The red boundary is the boundary where the ship will appear each time the
screen is redrawn. To configure the external red boundary, use the upper slider
in the Ship Redraw Area section.
4. The green boundary is the internal limit of the ship redraw area. When the ship
reaches the boundary, the screen is redrawn and the ship is brought back to the Figure 171 Navi
external boundary. To configure the internal green boundary, use the lower Navigation data tab,
slider in the Ship Redraw Area section. Ship Redraw Area
section
5. After the ship redraw area has been set, outpress the Set button, to exit the ship
redraw area setup mode.

To turn on and setup the relative motion mode, do the following:

1. In the Navi Navigation Data tab, press the Relative button in the Ship Motion Mode section. In the
relative motion mode, the own ship symbol is stationary and the chart is moving.
2. The own ship position can be set in the following ways:
a. In the center tick the Ship in centre checkbox and the ship will always
be in the center of the screen.
b. Manually in the Manual Center panel check the Enable box to activate
the manual selection of the fixed ship position. Then press the Set button
Figure 172 Navi
and in the chart view select the fixed ship position by left-clicking in the
Navigation Data tab,
selected position (the selection mode is indicated by a red frame around
Manual Center
the chart view).
section
c. Automatically if the Ship in center or the Enable manual center
checkboxes are clear, the own ship position in the chart view is set on the outer boundary of the
own ship redraw area.

176
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.5.6 Light Sectors
The ECDIS allows displaying lights sectors and their visibility distances in the chart view.

To turn on and setup the lights sectors display, do the following:

1. Open the Chart Chart Presentation tab and switch to the Light sectors tab.

Figure 173 Chart Chart Presentation tab, Light sectors tab

2. To turn on the display of the limits of light sectors with the length corresponding to the actual visibility
distance of the lights, check the Real length checkbox. The visibility distance is not calculated; it is
taken from the light attributes and corresponds to the bridge height of 5 meters.
3. To turn on the highlight of light sectors in the chart view, check the Highlight sectors checkbox. Sectors
display is limited with the sectors visibility distance.
4. Select the sectors to be highlighted in the Highlight section.
a. To highlight sectors of user-specified lights, select the Chosen sectors option. To specify a light in
the chart view, move the mouse pointer to the light (the pointer will change to the target
pointer with a tip Select light sectors) and right-click on it. The sectors of the light will be
highlighted. To unselect the light, move the mouse pointer to the selected light (the pointer will
change to the target pointer with a tip Unselect light sectors) and right-click on it. The
highlight of the light will be cleared.
b. To highlight sectors of all lights, select the All sectors option.
c. To highlight only white sectors, select the White sectors option.
d. To highlight all light sectors in the area, press the Static button.
e. To highlight only sectors visible from the own ship, press the Ship button. Display of lights sectors
covering the own ship position only works in the navigation mode. When the navigation mode is
off, this function is automatically switched to the static mode.

177
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.6 Alarms
The ECDIS provides the system of alarms which announces by audible and visual means conditions
requiring attention.
When an alarm is activated, it is displayed in the Alarms panel and the Alarm button starts flashing red
.

IMPORTANT:

No use of the Silent Mode is allowed while the own ship is underway as it may affect safety of navigation.

The audible indication can be enabled or disabled only for all alarm conditions: there is a general alarm
buzzer control in the Config Alarm Setup tab. To allow using audible alarm indication for all alarm
conditions, check the Buzzer On/Off checkbox. To switch to the Silent Mode, clear the checkbox and
confirm the operation. The silent mode is indicated in the chart view: the Silent mode notice is displayed in
the upper left corner of the chart view.

Figure 174 Config Alarm Setup tab, Buzzer On/Off checkbox

7.6.1 Alarms and Warnings Panel

178
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
When an alarm is activated, a message describing the alarm is displayed in
the Alarm Conditions indicator and the Alarms indicator starts flashing
red to attract attention. If the message is not displayed completely because
of the lack of space, move the mouse pointer over it to open a tool tip with
the complete message text. Figure 175 Alarms and Alarm
Conditions indicators with the
The alarm is added to the alarms list. To open the alarms list and view all
alarm message tooltip
alarms activated at the moment, click on the Alarm indicator: the Alarms
and Warnings panel opens with the Alarms tab active.

Figure 176 Alarms and Warnings panel, Alarms tab

Activated alarm triggers sound indication and Alarms indicator flashing. To stop the sound indication and
indicator flashing, the alarm should be acknowledged. There are several ways to acknowledge an alarm.

To acknowledge an alarm, do the following:

1. Click on the alarm message in the Alarms panel.
2. Open the alarms list (click on the Alarms indicator) and left-click on the alarm entry. The loud-speaker
symbol is removed and the entry is moved to the last position in the list; the next alarm entry is
highlighted.
3. To acknowledge other alarms, use UP and DOWN arrow keys to select alarm entries and ENTER or
SPACE keys to confirm the acknowledgement.
After it has been acknowledged, the alarm is deactivated and its entry is deleted from the alarms list if the
alarm condition is not true anymore; otherwise the alarm is deactivated but its entry remains in the alarms
list. In some cases alarms are deactivated automatically after the alarm condition disappeared.
Besides alarms, there is another category of situations demanding attention on the part of the user: warnings.
Warnings are notices to the user which do not require acknowledgement and do not trigger the alarm buzzer.
In case there are active warnings, the Warnings indicator becomes yellow. Click on the indicator to open the
Alarms and Warnings panel. In the Warnings tab there is a list of all currently active warnings. Warnings
are removed from the list as soon as the warning condition is cleared.
In the Alarms and Warnings panel you can also acknowledge all AIS and ARPA targets. To acknowledge
AIS targets, press the Ack all AIS button; to acknowledge all ARPA targets, press the Ack all Targets
button.

179
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.6.2 Antigrounding Alarm
The ECDIS allows to set an anti-grounding guard zone ahead the own ship. All objects entering the guard
zone and considered to be dangerous activate the alarm.

To turn on and setup the anti-grounding alarm, do the following:

1. Open the Config Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Antigrounding alarm tab.

Figure 177 Config Alarm Setup tab, Antigrounding alarm tab

2. Set the anti-grounding guard zone area: it can be defined either by the time of prediction value or by the
dangers safety distance the zone with the bigger area is considered as the anti-grounding guard zone.
a. Time of prediction: enter a time value to the Time of prediction field (default time is 5 minutes).
The time of prediction defines the length of the anti-grounding guard zone which is the distance the
own ship will cover for the specified time proceeding with the current speed.
b. Dangers safety distance: enter a distance value to the Dangers safety distance (measurement units
are set in the Config Units and Time tab). The guard-zone will be build using the set distance.
3. To turn the display of the guard zone in the chart view on, check the Guard Zone Sector checkbox. To
turn the guard zone display off, clear the checkbox.
4. Select the guard zone angle in the drop-down list to the right from the Guard Zone Sector checkbox.
The angle of the guard zone can be set between 5 and 90 degrees. By reducing the angle to 5 degrees,
you will only have warnings of danger objects in front of the vessel.
5. To enable highlighting of danger objects located inside the guard zone, check the Danger Objects
Inside Guard Zone checkbox.
6. After you have set the anti-grounding alarm parameters, press the Set Parameters button for the
parameters to take effect.

180
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
When the anti-grounding alarm with the guard zone and highlighting of danger objects inside the zone are
activated, all objects with depths less than the set safety contour value will be highlighted in red inside the
guard zone. The danger objects are also added to the dangers and cautions lists. If a danger object is found in
the guard zone, the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes red and is called Dangers. If a caution object
is found in the guard zone, the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes orange and is called Cautions. To
view the Dangers and Cautions lists, click on the Dangers and Cautions indicator: the Dangers/Cautions
tab will open with the Dangers and Cautions tabs in it.

Figure 178 Display of the Guard Zone and danger objects inside the zone

NOTE:
In order to use the anti-grounding functionality efficiently, it is important to set the Safety Contour correctly
in the chart presentation (see chapter 5.6.5, Depth Settings).
The anti-grounding function uses the safety contour value and the own ship draft to determine anti-
grounding warnings.

181
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.6.3 Special Alarms
The ECDIS provides the possibility to set a depth alarm activated when the depth below keel is more or less
of the set depth limit as well as alarms when a detected AIS or ARPA target is lost.

To set the depth alarm, do the following:

1. Open the Config Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab.

Figure 179 Config Alarm Setup tab, Alarms tab

2. Enter the value of the depth below keel limit to the Depth below keel limit field. The measurement unit
for the depth is set in the Config Units and Time tab.
3. Check the More than or the Less than checkboxes (both options can be set at the same time):
More than the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value received from an input device is
more than the set depth limit;
Less than the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value received from an input device is
less than the set depth limit.
4. After the depth alarms parameters have been set, press the Apply button.

NOTE:
The depth value received from an input device is displayed in the navigational panel in the following format:
DPT 5.0/30.0m, where the first value is the depth from the water line to the transducer and the second
value is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom.
Depth information is displayed in the graph in the Info Echo Sounder Diagram tab.

To set a target lost alarm, do the following:

1. Open the Config Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab.
2. Check the Target lost alarm checkbox to set an alarm for loss of ARPA targets and the AIS lost alarm
checkbox for loss of AIS targets.
3. Settings are applied immediately.

182
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.6.4 Alarm Conditions List

The following alarm conditions are processed in ECDIS:

<Sensor Name> is lost The signal from one of the external sensors registered in the Config
Input/Output tab is lost. The name of the sensor is indicated in the alarm message. To deactivate
the alarm, click on the alarm message.
Man Over Board An alarm is activated when the MOB button is pressed. The alarm is
deactivated only after the MOB button is unpressed.
Exceed deviation The deviation of the own ship from the route exceeds the XTE (cross track
error) set for the route in the route plan (see chapter 6.4.4, Route Plan). The alarm is deactivated
when the own ship returns to the XTE limits.
Unknown Datum The chart currently displayed in the chart view has other than WGS-84
coordinates system. If the positioning device defines the own ship position in WGS-84 coordinates
and the chart has a different coordinates system, the own ship position in the chart view may be
wrong. If the alarm is activated, it is recommended to introduce a position correction in the Config
Input/Output tab (see chapter 7.2.4, Position Correction). The alarm is deactivated when a
WGS-84 chart will be displayed in the chart view.
Target lost An ARPA target is lost. For the Target lost alarm to be generated, the Target lost
alarm check box should be set in the Config Alarm Setup Alarms tab and the target should
be inside the Lost Target Alarm Range set in the Config Targets ARPA tab. If the Target
lost alarm check box is not set or the target was lost while outside the range, no alarm is generated.
AIS lost An AIS target is lost. For the AIS lost alarm to be generated, the AIS lost alarm check
box should be set in the Config Alarm Setup Alarms tab and the target should be inside the
AIS targets visibility range set in the Config Targets AIS tab. If the AIS lost alarm check
box is not set or the AIS target was lost while outside the visibility range, no alarm is generated.
Dangerous target A dangerous ARPA target is detected. An ARPA target becomes dangerous
when it enters the Distance to Dangerous range set in the Config Targets ARPA tab.
Dangerous AIS A dangerous AIS target is detected. An AIS target becomes dangerous when it
enters the Distance to Dangerous range set in the Config Targets AIS tab.
Hardware errors A hardware error occurred.
Invalid checksum of data from sensor <sensor name> The checksum of an incoming sentence
calculated by ECDIS and the checksum stated in the sentence do not match.
Safety contour crossed The own ship or the anti-grounding Guard Zone crossed the specified
safety contour.
Synchronization failed Data synchronization failed.
OnBoard test running System test is running.
Depth < Below Keel Limit Depth below the keel is less than the specified depth limit.
Depth > Below Keel Limit Depth below the keel is more than the specified depth limit.
Radar processor disconnected The radar processor got disconnected.

183
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
7.7 Route Monitoring

7.7.1 Route Monitoring Mode

The route monitoring mode is switched on automatically when the voyage on a specified route is started.
When in the route monitoring mode, the ECDIS monitors the proceeding of the own ship along the route and
notifies you in case the own ship deviates from the route, approaches a waypoint or a control point, etc.
Before you can start a voyage along a route, the route should be created and edited using the route planning
tools in the Route Route Finder and Route Route Planning tabs (see chapter 6.4, Route Planning
and Plotting).

To switch on the route monitoring mode, do the following:

1. Open the Route Start Voyage tab.

Figure 180 Route Start Voyage tab

2. Select a route in the table of routes in the left-hand part of the tab. To show the route in the chart view,
press the Show Route button. To hide the route, press the Hide Route button.
3. Indicate the waypoints of the route between which route will be monitored. In the From table select the
start waypoint and in the To table select the end waypoint. Table headers will display the time of
departure from the start waypoint and the time of arrival to the end waypoint (in the brackets).
4. To switch to the route monitoring mode, press the Start Voyage button. The ECDIS will start
monitoring the own ship on the route. In the route monitoring mode, the route is shown in red; the
voyage information panel is displayed under the navigational panel and the Voyage indicator state
changes according to the current voyage situation. Also when in the route monitoring mode, the
Destination approached and Exceed deviation alarms can be activated if set in the Config Alarm
Setup Alarms tab.
5. To quit the route monitoring mode, outpress the Start Voyage button and confirm the operation.

184
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 The following route monitoring options can be set in the Route Start Voyage tab:
To set a pre-turn warning, switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre-turn warning
field. Within the specified time from the course shift point, the Voyage indicator in the indicators
panel (see chapter 2.3, Indicators Panel) will switch to the WOP Warn state (the indicator color
will become orange).
To set a pre-turn acknowledgement, switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre-turn
acknowledgement field. Within the specified time from the wheel over position, the Voyage
indicator in the indicators panel (see chapter 2.3, Indicators Panel) will switch to the WOP Ack
state (the indicator color will become red).
To be able to see tooltips when moving the mouse pointer over a waypoint in the chart view, switch
to the Settings tab and check the WPT tooltips checkbox.
To reverse the route so that the end point becomes the start point, press the Reverse Route button
and confirm the operation. To restore the route initial direction, outpress the Reverse route button
and confirm the operation.
If the WPT labels checkbox is set, waypoint labels are displayed on the route in the route
monitoring mode. If the checkbox is not set, the Bearing label and the Speed label options are not
available.
If the Bearing label checkbox is set the planned bearing to the next waypoint will be displayed on
each leg of the route.
If the Speed label checkbox is set the planned speed to the next waypoint will be displayed on each
leg.
If the WOL checkbox is set the wheel-over line is displayed the next waypoint. The wheel-over line
marks the position of the course change. The WOL line is only displayed in the next waypoint and
is parallel to the next leg.

7.7.2 Route Monitoring Panel

After the voyage start the Route Monitoring panel opens. In the panel, information about the route is
displayed.

The following route monitoring data are displayed in the Route Monitoring panel:
Route name Name of the route that is being monitored;
WPT Number of the next waypoint and number of waypoints
in the route;
Name Name of the next waypoint;
TTG Time to go from the current own ship position to the
next waypoint:
If the indicator is green, the own ship proceeds in the
direction of the next waypoint;
If the indicator is red, the own ship proceeds in the
direction inverse to the direction of the next waypoint or
does not move at all;

185
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014 Figure 181 Route
Monitoring panel
Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 TTA Time to arrival from the current own ship position to the end waypoint;
ETA Estimated time and date of arrival to the end waypoint;
DTA Distance to arrival: distance from the current waypoint to the end waypoint;
BWOL Bearing to the next waypoint from the own ship (depends on the own ship current
position);
BWW Bearing from the current waypoint to the next waypoint;
DWOL Distance from the current own ship position to the next waypoint;
XTD Cross track distance on the leg;
If the indicator is green, the actual XTD is less than the planned XTD on the leg;
If the indicator is red, the actual XTD exceeds the planned XTD on the leg;
WPT List of waypoints that are not passed yet; select a waypoint in the list and in the TTG and
ETA lines below the time to go to and the estimated time of arrival to the selected waypoint are
displayed respectively;
TTG Time to go from the current own ship position to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list;
ETA Estimated time and date of arrival to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list.

7.7.3 Go to Waypoint Function

The Go to Waypoint function allows you to plot one waypoint that will be your destination. For example if
you are approaching a pilot station and port control suggests you drop anchor at some position and wait for
the pilot there, you may use the Go to waypoint function to set the required point and proceed there without
the full route planning procedure.

To use the Go to Waypoint function, do the following:

1. Stop the voyage if you are in the route monitoring mode.
2. Open the Route Go To tab.

Figure 182 Route Go To tab

3. Press the Edit button to switch to the waypoint plotting mode: the button name changes to Save. Plot the
waypoint in the chart window or enter the waypoint coordinates in the WP LAT and WP LON fields.
4. Release the Save button (the button name changes to Edit) to quit the waypoint plotting mode.

186
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. To switch to the route monitoring mode (monitoring of the route to the waypoint), press the Start button.
To quit the route monitoring mode, outpress the Start button (when pressed, its name changes to Stop).
6. To check the route from the own ship to the waypoint, press the Check route button. The route from
your vessel to the waypoint will be checked in the same way as in the Route Planning tool (two
additional panels will appear: the Dangers and the Cautions panels). The check route function only
works in the route monitoring mode.

Figure 183 Route Go to Waypoint tab, Dangers and Cautions tabs

7. To view the waypoint in the chart view, press the Show button; to hide the waypoint, outpress the Show
button (when pressed, its name changes to Hide).

187
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
8. NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION TOOLS
8.1 Echo Sounder
If an echo sounder is registered in the ECDIS in the Config Input/Output tab, the own ship depth data
are coming to the system. The depth data are displayed in the navigational panel in the DPT line as well as in
the Info Echo Sounder Diagram tab.
The DPT line in the navigational panel contains two values separated by a slash: the first value is the depth
from the water line to the transducer and the second value is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom.

The echo sounder diagram is made up of the following elements:

1. Time and depth axes: the time axis is the horizontal axis, and the depth axis is the vertical axis. The time
is measured in minutes, the depth measurement units are set in the Config Units and Time tab, in the
Depth/Elevation/Size units section.

Figure 184 Info Echo Sounder Diagram tab

2. The diagram field: double-click in any position in the diagram field and the own ship position
corresponding to the time and depth values in the identified diagram position will be marked in the chart
view with an arrow mark (to clear the highlight, press the Clear highlight button). Using this option,
you can mark such things as special places or fish echoes.
3. The current draft graph: the red dashed graph represents the current draft of the own ship. The data for
building the graph come from the Config Own ship tab.
4. The depth below keel graph: the black solid graph represents the depth from the transducer to the sea
bottom. The data for building the graph come from the external echo sounder.

To display sounding marks in the chart view, do the following:

1. Open the Info Echo Sounder Diagram tab.
2. Check the Marks ON/OFF checkbox. The sounding marks will be plotted in the chart view as the own
ship proceeds.
3. Select the interval of the marks plotting in the intervals list.
4. To delete all previously plotted sounding marks from the chart view, press the Reset button.

188
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 For the depth to be more precise, set the echo sounder sensor offset from the own ship keel. To do so:
1. Open the Config panel and go to the Own Ship tab and then to the Position of instruments tab.
2. Select the Echosounder in the instruments list.

Figure 185 Config Own Ship Position of Instruments tab

3. Set the offset of the instrument along the X axis in the X offset field, and the offset along the Y axis in
the Y offset field. NOTE that the password is required to set and save the settings.
4. The vertical offset of the echo sounder can either be set manually or taken from the DPT message of the
instrument. To set it manually, enter a value to the Z offset field. To take the offset from the DPT
message, set the Use offset from DPT message check box. The vertical offset can be both positive and
negative. To save the setting, no password is required.
5. Save the settings by pressing the Save settings button.

8.2 AIS
The ECDIS implements the full support for the Automatic Identification System. Using the AIS
functionality, you can receive and view AIS data from AIS targets located at a specified distance from the
own ship and display the data in the chart view. You can also receive messages from AIS targets and send
the own ship AIS data and other messages to other vessels.

IMPORTANT:

For the ECDIS to be able to receive AIS data, the AIS receiver should be registered in the ECDIS. The
registration is carried out in the Config Input/Output tab.

8.2.1 AIS Targets Data

Information of all AIS targets with which the contact has been established is displayed in the Info
Targets AIS tab. The tab is made up of two panes: one of the panes contains the list of all AIS targets,
and the other displays detailed information about a specified target.
AIS targets with white background are targets inside the AIS visibility range set in the Config Targets
AIS tab (they are displayed in the map view); AIS targets with grey background are targets outside the AIS
visibility range (they are not displayed in the map view). Targets outside the visibility range are displayed at
the bottom of the targets list.

189
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
AIS targets are sorted by MMSI/Ship name in the targets list. Visible targets list and invisible targets list are
sorted separately.

Figure 186 Info Targets AIS tab

To view a targets information, select the target in the targets list. The information is displayed in two tabs:
the Position Report tab and the Static and Voyage Related Data tab.

In the Position Report tab, the following target information is displayed:

MMSI A unique 9-digit number assigned to a DSC radio station;
Ship Name Name of the AIS target (in case the target has any name);
CPA/TCPA Closest point of approach to the own ship / Time to the closest point of approach;
Type of ship Type of the AIS target;
Lat/Lon Latitude and longitude of the AIS target;
Position accuracy accuracy of the AIS target positioning;
COG/SOG/HDG/ROT Course over ground/ Speed over ground/ Heading of the AIS target/ Rate
of turn;
Nav Status Navigation status of the target e.g. Under way using engine;
Range/Bearing distance and bearing from the own ship to the target.

In the Static and Voyage Related Data tab, the following target information is displayed:
IMO Number the IMO assigned target number;
Call Sign a unique designation for the transmitting station;
Ship dimensions length and width of the target;
Position ref. point defines the precise location of the positioning device
on the target; four parameters are used: A, B, C, and D (Figure 187);
Type of pos. device the type of the device defining the target position;
ETA estimated time of arrival of the target to its destination;
Draught draught of the target;
Destination destination of the target; Figure 187
Parameters defining
the location of the
190
positioning device
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Message the last received message (if no messages were received, the field is not displayed).

NOTE:
You can query an AIS target information panel by selecting the AIS target in the chart view. To select a
target right-click on its symbol, the target style will change to the selected target and the AIS target display
window will appear in the chart view.

Figure 188 AIS target display window

Information displayed in the window repeats information displayed in the Info Targets AIS tab.

When the distance between an AIS target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous
approach set in the Config Targets AIS tab, the target is assigned the dangerous target status and
changes its style: it becomes red and starts flashing. To stop the target flashing, select it in the targets table in
the Info Targets AIS tab and press the Acknowledge button. The target still has the dangerous target
style, but stops flashing. To acknowledge all dangerous targets, press the Acknowledge all button.

To view messages received from an AIS target, do the following:

1. Select an AIS target in the targets list. If there were any messages from the target, the Show Received
Msg button becomes active (otherwise its grayed).
2. To view messages, press the Received Msg button. The Received Messages window will open where all
messages from the AIS target are displayed.

Figure 189 AIS messages, Received Messages window

191
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
8.2.2 AIS Targets Display
AIS targets can be displayed in the chart view. Using the AIS targets display functionality, you can evaluate
the current situation at one glance.
To turn the display of AIS targets on or off, left-click on the AIS indicator. If the display of AIS targets is
off, the AIS indicator is orange ; if the display of AIS targets is on, the AIS indicator is green
. You can also use the Visible check box in the Info Targets AIS tab to turn the display of
AIS targets on/off.
The activation of the AIS targets display depends on the targets distance and time from the own ship. The
activation distances and time are configured in the Config Targets AIS tab.

To configure the activation distances and time for AIS targets, do the following:
1. Open the Config Targets AIS tab.

Figure 190 Config Targets AIS tab, activation distances and time settings
2. Check or uncheck the Auto activation check box: if the check box is checked, the Distance to
Activation field becomes editable and you can set the value of the distance to activation different from
the distance to dangerous approach value; if the checkbox is unchecked, the value of the distance to
activation is set the same as the value of the distance to dangerous approach.
3. To be able to use the own ship AIS transmitter as a positioning device, check the Use own transmitter
as source of position checkbox. The transmitter will be added to the position sources list in the Position
Source section of the Navi Navigation Data tab (see chapter 7.2.1, Primary and Secondary Position
Sources).
4. To view AIS symbols in true scale, set the True scale symbol checkbox. AIS targets are displayed in
true scale if the following conditions are met:
a. width of the own ship true scale symbol is more than 7.5mm;
b. the AIS target is within the activation distance;
c. the AIS target heading (HDG) and position reference point data are available.
5. Set the Distance to Dangerous: the distance from the own ship at which all AIS targets are displayed as
dangerous. Press the Set button for the changes to take effect.
6. Set the Distance to Activation: the distance from the own ship at which all AIS targets are displayed as
active. This value should be more than the distance to dangerous approach. If the Distance to Activation

192
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 field is inactive, and you want to change the value, check the Automatic Activation checkbox. Press the
Set button for the changes to take effect.
7. Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA/TCPA to Dangerous section: if the actual CPA and TCPA of
the own ship and an AIS target are less than the set values, the target is displayed as dangerous. Press the
Set button for the changes to take effect.
8. Set the AIS targets visibility range: the distance from the own ship at which AIS targets become
visible. When targets cross the distance limit they are displayed on the chart. Turn the function on (check
the checkbox), enter the value to the edit field, and press the Set button. When the checkbox is checked,
the visibility range is displayed in the chart view as a circle with a blue dashed boundary (see Figure
191).
If you want all AIS targets to be displayed irrespective of their distance from the own ship, turn the AIS
targets visibility range function off altogether (clear the checkbox); the AIS targets visibility range
section will become grayed and all AIS targets in contact with the own ship will become visible.
AIS targets outside the set visibility range are indicated in the Info Targets AIS tab with a grey
background.
9. Turn the display of AIS zones on or off: check or clear options in the AIS zones display section. AIS
zones are displayed as circles with the center in the own ship position and with radiuses corresponding to
AIS targets activation distances. The AIS targets activation range is displayed as a blue circle and the
AIS targets danger range is displayed as a red circle. If the display of AIS targets is off, the AIS zones
are not displayed either.

Figure 191 AIS zones display

10. To turn on the display of AIS targets past track, check the Past track checkbox. The past track is
updated with the interval set in the Past track interval drop-down list. To delete the currently plotted
past tracks and to start plotting them over again, press the Reset button. You can set the past track length
by selecting a value in the Past track length drop-down list: the past track older than the selected value
will be erased automatically as the targets proceed.

193
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Depending on the presence of the AIS target signal and the distance between the target and the own ship,
there are the following types of AIS targets:

Symbol name and description Signal Distance to the Own Display

Ship

AIS Targets

Sleeping target Yes AIS targets visibility

A target symbol indicating the presence and range
orientation of an object equipped with an AIS in a
certain location.

Active target Yes distance to activation

A symbol representing the automatic or manual
activation of a sleeping target for the display of
additional graphically presented information
including a vector (speed and course over ground),
the heading, and ROT or direction of turn indicator
(if available) to display actual initiated course
changes.

Dangerous target Yes distance to dangerous

A symbol representing an AIS target (activated or approach;
not) which has approached the own ship closer CPA < CPA to
than the specified distance to the dangerous Dangerous and
approach. TCPA < TCPA to
Dangerous

Lost target No AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the last valid position of an range
AIS target before reception of data was interrupted.

Selected target Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the manual selection of any range
AIS target for the display of detailed information in
a separate data panel.

NOTE:
All AIS target symbols are oriented to the targets course. Active and dangerous target symbols have
additional features: heading lines and velocity vectors. Heading line is a solid line with the turn indicator at
the tip; it only shows the targets heading and does not give any information on the targets speed. Velocity
vector is a dashed line with minute marks on it; it is extending in the direction of the target course for a
length representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ships velocity vector.

Symbols of AIS targets with available CPA are drawn with solid lines , if CPA is not available symbols

194
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Symbol name and description Signal Distance to the Own Display
Ship

are drawn with dotted lines .

AIS Aids to Navigation (ATON)

Active ATON (real/virtual) on position Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing an active ATON on range
position.

Active ATON (real/virtual) off position Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing an active ATON off range
position.

Selected ATON (real/virtual) Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing manual selection of any range
AIS target for the display of detailed information in
a separate data panel.

Lost ATON (real/virtual) No AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the last valid position of an range
ATON before reception of data was interrupted.

AIS Search and Rescue Transmitters (AIS SART)

Active AIS SART Yes distance to activation

A symbol representing an active AIS SART, length
of the velocity vector shows the distance the target
will travel in the time interval used for own ships
velocity vector.

Selected AIS SART Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing manual selection of any range
AIS target for the display of detailed information in
a separate data panel.

Lost AIS SART No AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the last valid position of an range
AIS SART before reception of data was
interrupted.

All AIS Targets

The target is not displayed Yes out of the AIS targets no display
Targets are displayed only if they approach to the visibility range
own ship closer than the AIS targets visibility
range to avoid cluttering.

195
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Symbol name and description Signal Distance to the Own Display
Ship

The target is not displayed No any distance no display

no comments

8.3 ARPA
The ECDIS implements the full support for ARPA data. Using the ARPA functionality, you can receive and
view data of targets located by ARPA and display the data in the chart view.

IMPORTANT:

For the ECDIS to be able to receive ARPA data, ARPA should be registered in the ECDIS. The registration
is carried out in the Config Input/Output tab.

8.3.1 ARPA Targets Data

When ARPA equipment is connected and configured in the Config Input/Output tab, ARPA targets can
be monitored in the ECDIS. Target information can be viewed in the Info Targets tab. The panel consists
of three sub-tabs: the AIS tab, the ARPA targets tab and the Seetrac tenders tab. Information about targets
located and monitored with ARPA is displayed in the ARPA targets tab.

Figure 192 Info Targets tab, ARPA Targets tab

To view the target information, select the target in the targets list.

In the ARPA targets tab, the following target information is displayed:

Target number Target number
Name Target name
CPA Closest point of approach
TCPA Time to closest point of approach
Lat/Lon The latitude and longitude of the target
COG Course over ground

196
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 SOG Speed over ground
Status Status of the target (lost, tracking etc.)
Range Distance from the own ship to the target
Bearing Bearing to the target from own ship
Time Time of last received message
True/Relative Indicates if the target heading vector is true or relative. If the vector is measured in
relation to the North direction, it is true; and if it is measured in relation to the own ship course, it is
relative.
To scroll the chart view so that to display a target in the chart center, double-click a target entry.
When the distance between an ARPA target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous
approach set in the Config Targets tab, the target is assigned the dangerous target status and it changes its
style: the target becomes red and starts flashing. To stop the target flashing, select it in the targets table in the
Info Targets tab and press the Acknowledge button. The target will still have the dangerous target style,
but will stop flashing. To acknowledge all dangerous targets, press the Acknowledge all button.

8.3.2 ARPA Targets Display

To turn the display of ARPA targets on or off, left-click on the ARPA indicator. If the display of ARPA
targets is off, the ARPA indicator is orange ; if the display of ARPA targets is on, the ARPA
indicator is green . You can also turn the targets display on/off using the Visible check box in
the Info Targets ARPA targets tab.

To configure the display of ARPA targets and tracks, do the following:

1. Open the Config Targets tab. The display of ARPA targets is configured in the ARPA sub-tab.

Figure 193 Config Targets tab, ARPA sub-tab

2. To turn on the display of the track passed by targets, check the Past track checkbox. Select the interval
of the track update in the Past track interval drop-down list (the interval value ranges from 1 second to
30 minutes). To delete the currently plotted past tracks and to start plotting them over again, press the
Reset button.

197
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. Set the distance to dangerous approach in the Distance to Dangerous field: enter a value in nautical
miles to the field and press the Set button for the setting to take effect. When a target approaches the own
ship to the distance closer than the distance to dangerous, the target symbol changes to the dangerous
target symbol and starts flashing.
For the symbol to stop flashing, acknowledge the target. To acknowledge a target, open the Info
Targets tab, ARPA sub-tab, select the target in the targets table and press the Acknowledge button; to
acknowledge all targets, press the Acknowledge all button. The target symbol will stop flashing.
4. Set the lost target alarm range: enter a value in nautical miles to the Lost Target Alarm Range and press
the Set button for the setting to take effect. If a target was lost while inside the set range, a Target Lost
alarm is generated; if outside the set range, no alarm is generated.
5. Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA/TCPA to Dangerous section and press the Set button for the
changes to take effect. If the actual CPA and TCPA of the own ship and a target are less than the set
values, the target is displayed as dangerous.
Depending on the presence of signal from targets and the distance between the targets and the own ship,
there are the following types of ARPA targets:

Symbol name and description Signal Distance ARPA targets

display

Target in acquisition state Yes any distance

The target detected in an acquisition area is
displayed as a flashing dashed red circle. It flashes
until it is acknowledged in the Info Targets tab.
If the target is dangerous its color stays red; if it is
not dangerous its color changes to green.

Tracked target Yes any distance

Dangerous target Yes distance to

If a target approaches the own ship to the distance dangerous
closer than the distance to dangerous approach set approach; or
in the Config Targets tab, it is designated the CPA < CPA to
dangerous status and the target symbol becomes Dangerous and
red and starts flashing. The target flashes until it is TCPA < TCPA
acknowledged. Once acknowledged, targets remain to dangerous
red until not dangerous anymore.

Selected target Yes any distance

Target selected in the chart view is automatically
selected in the targets table in the Info Targets
tab.

Lost target No any distance

A symbol representing the last valid position of a
target before reception of data was interrupted.

198
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Symbol name and description Signal Distance ARPA targets
display

Reference target Yes any distance

Tracked radar targets designated as reference
targets are labeled with the letter R.

no display No any distance no display

NOTE:
All target symbols are oriented to the targets course. The target symbols have speed vectors extended in the
direction of the targets course for a length representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval

used for own ships prediction vector (COG = 90, SOG = 10kn, prediction time interval
= 3min).

8.4 Radar Image Overlay

The ECDIS provides the possibility to display data received from radar in the chart view as a radar image
overlaying the chart.
To turn the display of the radar image on or off, left-click on the Radar indicator. If the display of the radar
image is off, the Radar indicator is orange ; if the display of the radar image is on, the Radar
indicator is green .

To configure the display of the radar image, do the following:

1. Open the Info Radar Image tab. If no radar board is connected to the ECDIS, all controls of the
Radar Image tab are inactive.

Figure 194 Info Radar Image tab

2. To start reading radar signal, press the Start Radar button; when pressed the name is Stop Radar.
3. To turn the display of the radar image on or off, use the Hide radar image checkbox (it works in the
same way as the Radar indicator described above). To hide the radar image, check the checkbox; to
display the radar image, clear the checkbox.
4. To turn on the display of a special symbol indicating the position of the radar on board the own ship,
check the Show position checkbox. The radar position is set in the Config Own Ship Radar tab.
5. Set a radar range: select a value in the Radar Ranges list.

199
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6. In the informational Radar Pulse section, the radar pulse duration is displayed.
7. To set values of different clutters to optimize the radar picture, use options from the Clutters section: the
Sea, the Rain, and the Gain clutters. When setting values to clutters you can either use sliders or select a
value from drop-down lists. For Sea and Gain clutters there is a possibility to set them to auto
configuring; to do so check the Auto checkboxes.
8. To adjust the radar image orientation, use the Orientation Adjustment scale.
9. In case there are failures in transmission of one of radar pulses (video, trigger, bearing or heading),
indicator of this pulse in the Radar Diagnostics section is colored red. If there are no failures, indicators
are green.
To use the radar image overlay functionality the ECDIS has to be connected to a PCI radar processor board.

200
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
8.5 Anti-collision Display

IMPORTANT:

Official anti collision tools that must be used for decision making are type approved Radar/ARPA, or ATA,
or EPA. Anti collision tool may only be used as a supplementary tool.

IMPORTANT:

The Anti-collision display module requires individual licensing.

The anti-collision display functionality is implemented to make it easier for you to evaluate the danger of
collision of the own ship with other vessels located with external input devices. The functionality is also
meant to help you to calculate and carry out maneuvers for passing the vessels at safe distances.
The anti-collision display functionality has two functions:
To indicate that the own ship has approached another vessel to the user-specified distance and time
(see chapter 8.5.3, Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits);
To indicate the possibility of collision (see chapter 8.5.4, Indication of Collision Risk).

8.5.1 Graphic Elements of the Anti-collision Display

The anti-collision display functionality is based on visualization of potentially dangerous situations that can
result in collision. The anti-collision image is built of collision danger lines and sectors built in true motion
between the own ship and the targets surrounding it. If there is a danger of collision of the own ship and any
of the targets, or if the distance or the time to closest point of approach between the own ship and a target are
less than the user-specified limits, color indication is introduced in the anti-collision image. In the figure
below all main features of the anti-collision image are displayed.

Figure 195 Graphic elements of the anti-collision display

The following graphic elements are used for the anti-collision display:
Own Ship the symbol of the own ship displayed in the position, received from the primary
positioning device;
Target the symbol of a target displayed in the position received from the target detection device;

201
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Own Ship Speed Vector/Target Speed Vector vector predicting the position of the own
ship/target where the own ship/target will be in a specified time, proceeding at the current course
and velocity. For your convenience, the own ship speed vector is highlighted with a thick line and a
green circle;
CPA limit (Closest Point of Approach) a circle with a radius equal to the minimum CPA set in
the Config System Anti-collision tab. If the own ship symbol enters the circle, the distance
between the own ship and the target is less than the set CPA limit.
Collision danger sector (CDS) if the end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the collision
danger sector, the own ship is going to pass the target at a distance less than the set CPA limit.
Collision danger line (CDL) if the end of the own ship speed vector lies on the collision danger
line, the own ship and the target are on a collision course.

8.5.2 Configuration of the Anti-collision Display

The Anti-collision display is configured in the Config Anti Collision Tool tab.

To configure the anti-collision display, do the following:

1. Open the Config Anti Collision Tool tab.

Figure 196 Config Anti Collision Tool tab

2. To turn the anti-collision display on, check the Anticollision ON/OFF checkbox. To turn the anti-
collision display off, clear the checkbox.
3. Set the time for prediction of the own ship position: select a value in the Scale Vector drop-down list.
The time value defines the length of the own ship speed vector: the end of the vector points to the
position at which the own ship will be in the specified time.
4. Set the minimum CPA distance: enter a value to the Radius of CPA limit circle field. The minimum
CPA distance determines the distance from the own ship center (CCRP) to a target. The allowable input
range is 0.0 to 5.0 nautical miles.
If the value you enter is less than the specified maximum length of the own ship, a warning appears
saying that this value can be dangerous: press No and the minimum allowable value will be set; press
Yes if you still want to set your value.

202
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 197 CPA limit warning
5. Set the maximum CPA distance: enter a value to the Maximum CPA field. If a target is at a distance to
the own ship equal or less than the maximum CPA distance, the target is relevant for the collision risk
evaluation. Targets with the CPA distance to the own ship larger than the maximum CPA are not
considered dangerous and are not included in the anti-collision display. The allowable input range is
from the specified CPA limit to 20.0 nautical miles.
6. Set the TCPA limit: enter a value to the TCPA limit field. If the target will reach the CPA to the own
ship in time equal or less than the TCPA limit, the target is relevant for the collision risk evaluation. The
allowable input range is 1.0 to 30.0 minutes. For the anti-collision display functionality to start
processing the target, the TCPA between the own ship and the target should be less than the specified
TCPA limit, and the distance between the target and the own ship should be less than the specified
maximum CPA.
7. Set the critical TCPA: enter a value to the TCPA Critical field. The critical TCPA is the minimum time
needed for the own ship to carry out a maneuver for safe passing the target. The TCPA critical is only
used if the distance between the target and the own ship is less than the minimum CPA distance. The
allowable input range is 1.0 to the specified TCPA limit value.
8. To turn on the display of speed vectors of all activated targets, check the Target Vectors checkbox.
9. To activate all selections or any changes which are made after the initial selection, press the Apply
Parameters button.

8.5.3 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits

The indication of the approach of targets to the own ship to the specified time and distance limits is used to
warn the user that the distance and time between the own ship and the target have reached a critical value.

The anti-collision functionality requires setting the following limits:

The distance (maximum CPA) and time (TCPA limit) between the own ship and a target at which
the target is activated in the anti-collision display; and the user is recommended to start evaluating,
calculating and carrying out collision avoidance actions in case the collision risk exists;
The critical distance (minimum CPA distance or radius of CPA limit circle) and time (TCPA
critical) at which the user has the minimum time to take decisions on collision avoidance actions.
The above described parameters are set in the Config Anti Collision Tool tab.
The table below describes changes in graphic elements of the anti-collision display brought about by changes
in time and distance between the own ship and targets. The user-set minimum and maximum limits of
distance and time are compared to the actual CPA and TCPA of the own ship and targets and the distance
and time between the own ship and targets. Actual CPA and TCPA, and time and distance values are
displayed in the Info Targets AIS tab for AIS targets, in the Info Targets ARPA targets tab for
ARPA targets.

203
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Change Condition Image

Anti-collision display on (CPAactual < CPAmax) AN

D (TCPAactual < TCPAmax)

CDL is highlighted with red TCPAactual < TCPAmin

CDS is off, CDL is displayed Distance < CPAmin

8.5.4 Indication of Collision Risk

The risk of collision of the own ship with a target is defined in the anti-collision display functionality by the
position of the own ship speed vector in relation to the CDS and CDL:
If the end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS, the distance at the CPA will be less then
the specified minimum CPA distance;
If the end of the own ship speed vector lies directly on the CDL, the distance at the CPA will equal
zero, which means that the vessels will collide.
In both cases there is a risk of collision. To indicate the collision risk, the CDS is shaded orange.
If the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS, there is no collision risk, and the CDS is not shaded.

204
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
The table below shows how graphic elements of the anti-collision display change depending on the collision
risk.

Change Condition Image

CDS is not shaded The own ship speed

vector lies outside the
CDS.

CDS is shaded orange The own ship speed

vector lies inside the
CDS.

205
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
8.5.5 Example and Recommendations for the Anti-collision Display Use
Consider two vessels, own ship and a target, on collision course. The range from the own ship to the target is
7.5 nautical miles and the bearing from the own ship to the target is 037. The target speed is 15 knots and
the course is 270. The own ship speed is 20 knots and the course is 000.
1. The Figure 198 shows the display of the cone-shaped collision danger sector (CDS) and the collision
danger line (CDL) to the target in true motion. The user-defined target selection criteria are:
Scale Vector = 12 min
CPA Limit = 1.0 NM
Maximum CPA = 2.0 NM
TCPA Limit = 24 min
TCPA Critical = 6 min

Figure 198 Display of the cone-shaped collision danger region and line to the target in true motion
The green circle with the centre at the own ship position shows the tip of the own ship speed vector. This
is in order to make it visually easy for the user to determine the amount of evasive action needed to
satisfy the selected CPA limit.
When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS the sector is shaded orange color to
highlight the importance of the target for the collision risk evaluation. The Figure 198 shows a traffic
situation when own ship is on a direct collision course with the target as the tip of the speed vector lies
on the CDL (the red dashed line in the centre of the CDS).

206
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS, there is no collision risk and the CDS is
not shaded. The Figure 199 shows that own ship has made a course change to starboard and will
therefore pass astern of the target with a distance slightly above the specified CPA limit.

Figure 199 Course change by the own ship to avoid collision

207
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. An alternative evasive action by the own ship is a speed reduction (here, from 20 to 14 knots (Figure
200)) in order to achieve the specified minimum CPA distance with a minimum deviation from the
original track line. The third alternative is a combination of course and speed change.

Figure 200 Speed change by the own ship to avoid collision

208
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
4. As the relative distance is decreasing, the own ship speed vector length has to be adjusted in order to still
be able to judge the collision risk and the potential evasive action. The Figure 201 shows that the own
ship speed vector length should be decreased below the present 12 minutes. Use the Scale Vector option.

Figure 201 Adjust the vector length

209
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
5. The vector length is now decreased to 6 minutes and the OOW can still judge collision risk. The collision
danger sector and line are scaled accordingly.

Figure 202 The length of the own ship speed vector is changed to 3 minutes

210
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6. When the actual TCPA is less than the specified minimum TCPA, the CDL is highlighted in red bold to
attract the attention of the user. Further decrease in the length of the own ship speed vector is required.
An evasive/escape action should be urgently considered by the user.

Figure 203 The TCPA is violating the TCPA Critical value the collision danger line gets bold red
7. Vector length is decreased to 1 minute and ECDIS display is zoomed in to see more details.

211
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 204 Further decrease of vector length

212
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
8. By using the ERBL the user can easily determine the amount of escape action necessary to pass astern of
the target with the required safety margin (1.0 NM), i.e. 60 degrees to starboard. The TCPA Critical
parameter must reflect the maneuvering characteristics of the ship: VLCC will need more time to change
its course than a HSC.

Figure 205 Use of the ERBL tool to assess the maneuver

213
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
9. Own ship has now changed course so that it will pass astern the target at a slightly less distance than the
CPA limit.

Figure 206 The change of course by the own ship to avoid collision (CPA is close to the set CPA Limit)

214
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
10. It is important to maintain the evasive manoeuvre until the target has been passed (the TCPA value in the
Info Targets ARPA Targets tab is unreachable).

Figure 207 Evasive action is maintained until TCPA is unavailable

215
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
11. When the distance to the target is equal to, or less than, the CPA limit, the collision danger sector
disappears and the collision danger line only is displayed.

Figure 208 The distance to target is equal or less than the CPA limit only collision danger line is displayed

216
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
12. The collision danger line disappears from the screen when the targets closest point of approach has been
passed, i.e. the TCPA value in the Info ARPA Targets ARPA targets tab is increasing.

Figure 209 The collision danger line disappears

217
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
13. The own ship can now change the course to come back to its original track line.

Figure 210 Own ship returns to its original course

218
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
9. OTHER NAVIGATIONAL TOOLS
9.1 Range and Bearing from Own Ship to Other Objects

9.1.1 ERBL
Electronic range and bearing line tool is intended for easy measuring of ranges and bearings between objects
in the chart view. With the tool you can measure ranges and bearings between the own ship and any point in
the chart view, as well as between any two points in the chart view; you can also fix a range as a circle
around the own ship to monitor objects within the range.

NOTE:
Measurement units for ranges are set in the Config Units and Time tab.

To turn on the ERBL mode, press the ERBL button in the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel (to
open the panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator). To turn the ERBL mode off, outpress the
ERBL button.

Figure 211 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel, ERBL button

To measure the range and bearing between the own ship and a point in the chart, do the following:
1. Turn the ERBL mode on. In the chart view, range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as
orange dashed lines. The ERBL center is in the own ship position.
2. Point the mouse pointer to any object in the chart view. The range and bearing to and from values are
displayed in the mouse pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view.
3. Turn the ERBL mode off.

To measure the range and bearing between any two points in the chart, do the following:
1. Turn the ERBL mode on. In the chart view, range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as
orange dashed lines. The ERBL center is in the own ship position.
2. Point the mouse pointer to the first point and left-click: the ERBL center will be fixed in this point.

219
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. Point the mouse pointer to the second point. The range and bearing to and from values are displayed in
the mouse pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view.
4. To release the ERBL center, left-click in the chart view: the center will be fixed in the own ship position
again.
5. Turn the ERBL mode off.

NOTE:
Ranges can be measured as great circle arcs or as rhumb lines. The calculation mode is set in the Check
points panel (see chapter 9.1.2, Check Points).

To fix a range around the own ship, do the following:

1. Turn the ERBL mode on. In the chart view, range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as
orange dashed lines. The ERBL center is in the own ship position.
2. Measure the required distance from the own ship using the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of
the chart view and right-click. The range will be fixed around the own ship and will move as the own
ship moves.
3. To release the ERBL, right-click in the chart view.
4. Turn the ERBL mode off.

9.1.2 Check Points

The check points functionality allows you setting up to three checkpoints. Check points are the points to
which the distance and bearing from the own ship are constantly displayed in the chart view. The values of
the distances and bearings are updated as the ship moves.

To set a check point, do the following:

1. Open the Check points panel: move the mouse pointer over the scale
indicator to open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel and press
the Check points button.
2. Choose whether the bearing from the own ship to check points should be
true (angle between the direction to the north and the direction to the
object) or relative (angle between the ship course and the direction to the
object). To set the true bearing, check the True/Relative checkbox to the
right from the check point name, to set the relative bearing, clear the
True/Relative checkbox.
3. Select the calculation mode for distances in the Calculation Mode drop- Figure 212 Check points
down list: distances can be calculated as great circle arcs or as rhumb panel
lines.
4. To plot a check point in the chart view, check one of the Check point checkboxes. The Check points
panel will close and the check points editing mode will turn on.
5. Plot the checkbox in the chart view: point the mouse pointer to the reference object and left-click. The
check point will be plotted in the chart view. The check point is connected with the own ship with a
range and bearing line. The values of the range and bearing are displayed in the range and bearing

220
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 indicators at the bottom of the chart view. The T letter near the bearing value means true bearing and
the R letter means relative bearing.

Figure 213 Control points in the chart view

6. To remove a check point, open the Check points panel and clear the checkbox corresponding to the
check point you want to remove. To remove all check points, press the Clear All button.

9.1.3 Range and Bearing to the Mouse Pointer

To turn on the display of the range and bearing from the own ship to the mouse pointer, open the Check
points panel and check the Cursor DIST/BRG checkbox. The range and bearing are displayed in the range
and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view.

NOTE:
Ranges can be measured as great circle arcs or as rhumb lines. The calculation mode is set in the Check
points panel (see chapter 9.1.2, Check Points).

9.2 Man Overboard and Position Fix

9.2.1 Man Overboard Functionality

In case someone or something has fallen over board, you can use the Man Overboard functionality. Using the
functionality, you can plot a symbol in the accident position and monitor it as the own ship moves.

To use the MOB functionality, do the following:

1. Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel (move the mouse pointer

over the scale indicator) and press the MOB button. The Man
Overboard mode is turned on: a Man Overboard symbol is plotted in the
current own ship position and the position coordinates are recorded as a MOB
entry in the logbook. As the own ship sails, the range and bearing to the MOB
position are constantly updated and shown on the range and bearing line. Figure 214 MOB
symbol

221
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
2. The MOB symbol is being updated until the MOB button is pressed. To stop updating the MOB position
and delete the symbol outpress the MOB button.

9.2.2 Position Fix Functionality

The position fix functionality allows plotting a symbol in the own ship current position to mark this position.

To use the Position Fix functionality, do the following:

1. Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel (move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator) and

press the Fix position button.

2. A Fix Position symbol is plotted in the current own ship position and the position object is added to the
mariner objects database (see chapter 6.3, Mariner Objects).

Figure 215 Fix symbol

9.3 Log Book

The ECDIS contains an automatic log book function. The log book records all events that occur during a
voyage as well as the own ship positions and configuration changes. The log book also has a playback
feature to allow a voyage to be recreated in a controlled environment.
Together with the main ship log book the ECDIS keeps the ship track log. The main log book contains
entries of all classes (System, Track, Voyage, User records, ARPA targets, and AIS targets), whereas the
track log only contains entries of the Track class. The difference between the main log and the track log is
that in the main log records Track entries at regular intervals, and the track log records all Track entries
coming from the primary and secondary position sources.

9.3.1 Viewing Log Book Entries

To view the log books, do the following:

1. Open the Log Book panel.
2. To view the main log press the Main Logbook toggle button, and to view the track log press the
Complete Track toggle button. Both logs share the same user interface. If there are differences in
functioning of an interface element for the main log and the track log, it will be mentioned in the element
description.

222
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 216 Log Book panel
3. Set the date and time period at which you want to view log book records: select the date in the Date
drop-down list and set the beginning time in the From field and the end time in the To field. By default
the log book is opened at the date that was viewed last. For example, to view today's log book, the date
has to be reset.
4. Set the time system for the time display: select the Ships Time or the UTC Time option in the drop-
down list to the right from the To field.
5. After the time has been set, log book entries for the specified date and time will be displayed in the
entries table. Every entry in the log book contains the following information:
Class Describes the type of information (see below);
Level Describes the importance of the entry: information, warning or alarm;
Type A general description of the entry (e.g. POS (Position), User Remark, Chart Scale and
Angle);
Date The date and time of the entry (UTC or Ships depending of the time system setting);
Remark Recorded information itself. It contains detailed information on what has been added to
the logbook: coordinates, course, echo sounder depth, etc;
6. To set a filter and display entries of selected classes only, check those entry classes you want to be
displayed. Select the classes in the classes list in the left part of the panel. In order to deselect a class
clear its checkbox. The option is not available for the track log. The record classes are the following:
System Changes made to the system configurations;
Track Logging position / changing chart scale;
Voyage Logging events when sailing a route;
User records Entry added by the operator;
Targets ARPA activity;
AIS targets AIS activity;
7. To refresh the log book data, press the Refresh button. Usually this is not required as the log book data
are refreshed automatically at regular intervals.
8. To add a remark, press the Add Remark button, the Add Remark window will open. Enter the remark
in the window and press the OK button. A User records class entry will be added to the log book. If you
add a user remark when the track log is on, it still will be added to the main log.

223
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
9. To scroll the chart view to the coordinates of a log book entry, select the entry in the entries table and
press the Go to position button. The position will be displayed in the center of the chart view and
marked with an arrow symbol. Please note that it is required that the selected log book entry had position
information in the remark field; otherwise an error message will appear.
10. To create a route using the current log book entries, press the Save as Route button. The Select Route
Name window will open: enter the route name to the Output Route Name field and press the OK
button. The route will be created and added to the existing routes. You can edit the route in the Route
Route Planning tab.

NOTE:
This function creates a route from all the recorded own ship positions of the log book in view. Each point of
the track will become a waypoint in the created route. This may be useful in order to sail the same route
later or to export the route to another system. This function, when used in the track log, provides the
possibility to set time interval for the track points to be recorded to the route.

11. To print the log book out, press the Print button. The log book will be converted to the *.doc format
and opened in the Reach Text Editor (the program is installed together with ECDIS). Print the log book
using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality (File Print).
12. Sometimes user remarks can be too long and not fit in the log book Remark field. To view the remark
tip when pointing the mouse pointer at the remark, check the Remark Hints checkbox.
13. To delete a log book page, press the Cleanup button, the Cleanup logbook window will open. In the
Cleanup logbook window, select pages you want to delete, press the Delete selected button and confirm
the operation. The selected log book pages will be deleted.

NOTE:
The page currently displayed in the Log Book panel cannot be deleted as well as pages for the day before
and the day after.

224
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
14. To export a log book page to a file, display the page in the Log Book panel and press the Export button,
the Export day log book dialog will open. In the dialog, select the folder where to save the log book
page and press the OK button. In the selected folder a Logbook folder is created and the log book page is
saved to this folder. The log book page is saved as two files: the name of the files is the date of the page
and extensions are *.lbk and *.lbt.

Figure 217 Export day log book dialog

15. To import a log book page, press the Import button. The Import day log book dialog will open. In the
dialog, select the folder where the log book file is stored. In the pane next to the folder tree pane, the list
of all log book pages in the selected folder will be displayed. Select a page, press the OK button, and
confirm the operation. The log book page will be imported to the log book and available for display and
playback.

Figure 218 Import day log book dialog

225
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 IMPORTANT:

Imported log book page overwrites the page with the same date.

9.3.2 Log Book Play-Back

Using the play-back functionality of the log book, you can view the log book entries animated in the chart
view.

To play-back the log book, do the following:

1. Open the Log Book panel.

Figure 219 Log Book panel, play-back controls

2. Open the log book page you want to play back. To do so, set the date and the time period at which the
data were recorded in the log book in the Data and the From and To fields.
3. Select the replay speed in the Replay speed drop-down list. The replay speed defines the time scale
during playing. For example, if the replay speed is x2, events will be replayed two times faster than they
happened in reality.
4. If you want the play-back to be cyclical, check the Cycle playback checkbox.
5. To start the play-back, press the Start Play Back button. After pressing the Start Play Back button and
confirming that you really want to switch the Playback Mode on, in the upper left corner of the chart area
a large letter R (Replay) appears, informing you that you are in the Playback Mode. Also under the
Indicators panel a special Replay panel appears.

Figure 220 Replay panel

The chart window will display position and scale equal to those during sailing. Date and time
corresponding to the playback events are displayed in the Replay panel. In the right part of the panel,
position, course and speed of the own ship are shown. Position of the own ship on the chart also
corresponds to the replay time.
The buttons on the Replay panel are the following:
Play

226
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 If the Cycle playback checkbox is ticked, playback will be resumed from the first
record otherwise replay will be stopped after reaching the last record.
Stop

Step back/forward buttons allow viewing the ship's movement step by step.

To begin/To end buttons go to the first or last logbook record.

Switch playback off button switches the Playback Mode off. Pressing the button is
equal to releasing the Start Play Back button (in activated condition called Stop
Play Back) in the Log Book panel. The Replay panel will be removed from the
screen and in the chart window the current ship's position will be displayed.

9.4 Navi Calculator

The navigators calculator is an additional tool designed to help you in performing various geodetic tasks not
solved automatically by the ECDIS. The Navi Calculator performs the following tasks:
inverse geodetic problem
direct geodetic problem
calculating great circle points
converting coordinates from one datum to another

To solve the inverse geodetic problem, do the following:

1. Open the Info Navi Calculator Distance / Bearing tab.

Figure 221 Info Navi Calculator tab, Distance/Bearing tab (for direct and inverse geodetic problems)
2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections. To show the line connecting the positions
with the specified coordinates in the chart view, press the Show button.
3. Select a measurement unit for distance (Nautical Miles, Statute Miles or kilometers) in the drop-down
list near the DIST field.
4. Select the mode of calculation (Great Circle or Rhumb Line) in the Mode drop-down list.
5. Press the DIST/BRG button.

227
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
6. The calculated values of distance and bearings to and from will be displayed in the DIST, Bearing To
and Bearing From fields.
7. To clear the calculator, press the Clear All button.

To solve the direct geodetic problem, do the following:

1. Open the Info Navi Calculator Distance / Bearing panel.
2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point section.
3. Enter the distance value in the Distance field and select a measurement unit for distance (nautical miles,
statute miles or kilometers) in the drop-down list to the right from the field.
4. Enter the Bearing to and Bearing from values.
5. Select the mode of calculation (Great Circle or Rhumb Line) in the Mode drop-down list.
6. Press the Calculate End Point button to calculate coordinates of the end point. The end point
coordinates will be displayed in the End Point section. To show the line connecting the start point and
the end point in the chart view, press the Show button.
7. To clear the calculator, press the Clear All button.

To calculate great circle points, do the following:

1. Open the Info Navi Calculator Great Circle tab.

Figure 222 Info Navi Calculator panel, Great Circle tab (for the great circle calculations)
2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections. To show the line connecting the positions
with the specified coordinates in the chart view, press the Show button.
3. Select a measurement unit for the step distance (nautical miles, statute miles or kilometers) in the drop-
down list near the Step field.
4. Enter the distance value of the step in the Step field.
5. Press the Ortodromia Points button. Coordinates of the great circle points will be displayed as a list of
coordinates in the special list area.
6. To clear the calculator, press the Clear All button.

228
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 To convert coordinates from one datum to another, do the following:
1. Open the Info Navi Calculator Datum Transformation tab.

Figure 223 Info Navi Calculator tab, Datum Transformation tab

2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point section.
3. Select the original datum in the From Datum drop-down list.
4. Select the target datum in the To Datum drop-down list.
5. Press the Transform button and read converted coordinates in the End Point section. To view the line
connecting the start point and the end point, press the Show button.
6. To clear the calculator, press the Clear All button.

229
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
10. Change Control
VersionNo. DateofIssue Author(s) Briefdescriptionofchange
1.0 August2013 TorbenHolmelund/ NewIssue
BentleyStrafford
Stephenson
1.1 November TorbenHolmelund/Bentley AppendixGadded
2013 StraffordStephenson

1.2 November TorbenHolmelund/Bentley AppendixHadded

2013 StraffordStephenson

1.3 December TorbenHolmelund/Bentley AppendixIadded

2013 StraffordStephenson

1.4 December TorbenHolmelund/Bentley AppendixIremovedandsection

2013 StraffordStephenson 3.3.7added

1.5 December TorbenHolmelund/Bentley Amendmentstosection3.3.6

2013 StraffordStephenson

1.6 August2014 CarlSloan UpdatedinformationforRussian

RegisterAppendicesI,J,K&L.
IncludedLanguageselection,
AppendixM

230
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX A Open and close of internet connection. (Update of ECDIS
maps and services)

When the equipment is booted, the iECDIS program is started automatically.

To activate the main menu, push the Windows key

Figure 224 - Main menu all network to gateways OFF.

The Main Menu have two functions:

Activate/deactivateinternet
connection.
ShowServicemenu.

As default, all the NICs used for internet

connection are disabled.

By clicking on [Mobile internet] the NIC will be enabled, and a connection to the internet established via 3G.

Figure 225 - Main Menu with active internet via mobile 3G.

Activate connection to internet via mobile 3G, by

clicking the [Mobile internet].
When the NIC is activated, it changes from red to green.

231
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Figure 226 Main Menu with active internet via satellite link.

Activate connection to internet via satellite

link, by clicking the [SAT internet].
When NIC is activated, it changes from red to
green.

To deactivate a NIC (Green), just click on the green button, and the NIC will be deactivated, and change to
RED color.

232
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX B Troubleshooting
Trouble Probable Cause Solution

A hardware alarm. HW malfunction. Plug/unplug cables etc.

Position Device lost alarm. Reception of signal from the Contact your system administrator.
device is interrupted.

The Input/Output configuration Contact your system administrator.

has been changed.

Invalid data from <> Data of the () sentence from the Contact your system administrator.
device () alarm <> device is not valid.

Invalid checksum of data Checksum value of () sentences Contact your system administrator.
from <> device () from <> device is not valid.
alarm

No sensors can be set up: No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed: in the
empty sensors list in the Input/Output program module. Data Licensing tab press the License
Config Input/Output list button and select Software Modules
tab. in the Databases drop-down list. The
ECDIS_IO (ECDIS) license should be
installed.
If not, apply the license and restart
ECDIS.

eToken problems. Plug/unplug eToken; restart ECDIS.

Position sensor is set up, but Data from the position sensor are Check configuration of the position
coordinates, COG and SOG invalid. sensor. If changes in configuration are
indicators are orange and the needed, contact your system
DR mode is indicated as the administrator.
currently used positioning
device. Data from the position sensor are Check that the position sensor is
not being received. plugged to ECDIS and powered on.

Position sensor is set up, but No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed: in the
coordinates, COG and SOG Input/Output program module. Data Licensing tab press the License
indicators are red and no list button and select Software Modules
data are displayed. in the Databases drop-down list. The
ECDIS_IO (ECDIS) license should be
installed.
If not, apply the license and restart
ECDIS.

233
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

Gyrocompass sensor is set Data from the gyrocompass Check configuration of the gyrocompass
up, but the HDG indicator is sensor are invalid. sensor. If changes in configuration are
orange. needed, contact your system
administrator.

Data from the gyrocompass Check that the gyrocompass sensor is

sensor are not being received. plugged to ECDIS and powered on.

Log sensor is set up, but the Data from the log sensor are Check configuration of the log sensor. If
STW indicator is orange. invalid. changes in configuration are needed,
contact your system administrator.

Data from the log sensor are not Check that the log sensor is plugged to
being received. ECDIS and powered on.

A sensor is set up, but its Data from the sensor are invalid. Check configuration of the sensor. If
value indicator is red and no changes in configuration are needed,
data are displayed. contact your system administrator.

Data from the sensor are not being Check that the sensor is plugged to
received. ECDIS and powered on.

Chart view is empty. No databases are registered in the Check the Data Databases tab,
system. Registered DB list.

No databases are added to the Add all available databases to the view
view. (Data Add/Remove Database tab).

No charts are in the focus of the Display any chart in the chart view
screen. (Data Chart Catalogue tab, select a
DB, expand any plus symbol and
double-click on any chart).

Chart view scale is too large Zoom the chart view out, e.g. to
(larger than 1:1000). 1:1 000 000.

Latitude is more than 90 N/S. Set Latitude to 0.

Detailed charts are not License for the current DB is not Check the license availability in the
displayed. available. Data Licensing tab: press the
License list button and select the current
DB in the Databases drop-down list.
If necessary reinstall the DB license.

Chart view scale is too small to Display an area with coastal line and
display detailed charts (e.g. zoom the chart view in, e.g. to 1:10 000.
1:500 000).

234
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

No licensed zone/area in the chart Scroll the chart view so that to display
view. licensed zone/area.

Database is licensed but No databases are added to the Add all available databases to the view
chart view is empty. view. (Data Add/Remove Database tab).

No charts are in the focus of the Display any chart in the chart view
screen. (Data Chart Catalogue tab, select a
DB, expand any plus symbol and
double-click on any chart).

An Unserveyed area is displayed Zoom the chart view out, scroll the chart
in the chart view. view to another location.

Database is registered but The list has not been refreshed Press the Refresh button.
not available in the automatically.
Add/Remove Database list.

Database is stored on a DVD The list has not been refreshed Press the Find databases button.
or USB flash drive but is not automatically.
displayed in the Available
Databases list in the Data Not all DB files are available. Check that all necessary DB files are
Databases tab. available on the data storage device.

Available DB is not in the Only DB in the CM93v3 format can be

CM93v3 format. registered in the system.

Missing data. Please check Wrong database is selected. Select a correct DB in the Databases
that you have registered. drop-down list in the Data Licensing
message appears when trying tab.
to apply a license manually.
Wrong Zone/Area is selected. Select a correct Zone/Area in the zones
and areas list in the Data Licensing
tab.

Wrong license number. Make sure the entered license number is

typed correctly.

Problem with eToken Plug/unplug eToken and try to apply the

license again.

License is stored on the The list has not been refreshed Press the Find licenses button.
removable device but the automatically.
licenses list in the Data
Licensing Add License Wrong database is selected. Select a correct DB in the Databases
from file tab is empty. drop-down list in the Data Licensing
tab.

235
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

The license is issued for a Contact your data provider.

different System ID.

License file extension is not Contact your data provider.

*.USR.

The Add License from file TestBase, ChartletsBase or a DB Select another DB except mentioned.
button is not displayed. imported from the S-57 format is
selected.

Automatic updates are not DB is not licensed. Apply license and try to receive updates
received. once more.

Wrong DB is selected Select a correct DB in the Data Auto

Updating Auto Updating tab.

Unspecified error message Removable device is write- Allow writing to the removable device.
is displayed during the protected.
SemiAuto updating
procedure.

In the Updates Review its Problem with eToken. Plug/unplug eToken and try to expand
not possible to expand records after that.
records after the chart name
record. No license for the current DB is Install license.
installed.

236
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

Dynamic Licensing function Current eToken number has no Contact service provider.
doesnt work. subscription on the Dynamic
Licensing server.

Function is not enabled. In the Data Dynamic Licensing tab,

check the Enable Dynamic Licensing
checkbox.

No ENC DB is registered. Register an ENC DB.

Charts you are trying to open To check this open the Data
using dynamic licensing are Licensing tab, select the ENC DB in the
already licensed. Databases list and press the Licenses
list button.

Service is not initialized. Request and download updates for the

database.

The credit rest is not enough to Refill the credit.

perform dynamic licensing.

Manual Update object is Created object is not displayed on Set the All other display type.
created but not displayed on the current Display Type.
the chart.
Created object is applied to the In the Chart Manual Update tab
chart which is no longer displayed expand the chart name record and
due to manipulations with the double-click on the created object.
chart.

The object has a Scale minimum Zoom the chart view in or out depending
or Scale maximum attribute and on the situation.
the chart view scale is smaller
than the minimum scale or larger
than the maximum scale.

S57 data is stored on the The list has not been refreshed Press the Find databases button.
removable device but the automatically.
S57 Source Data list in the
Data Import S57 tab is Name of the S57 data folder on Change the name of the folder and press
empty. the removable device is not the Find databases button once more.
ENC_ROOT.

Internal error message is Problem with eToken. Plug/unplug eToken and try import S57
displayed during import of data after that.

237
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution
S57 data.
No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed: in the
ImportS57 program module. Data Licensing tab press the License
list button and select Software Modules
in the Databases drop-down list. The
CM933CMP and V3CATMGR
(ImportS57) licenses should be installed.
If not, apply the licenses.

One or more arguments are No source data are selected. Select a source S57 exchange set and try
invalid message is displayed importing data again.
during import of S57 data.
Data storage device with the Press the Find databases button to
selected exchange set has been refresh the S57 source data list.
disconnected or the exchange set
has been removed from the
device, and the S-57 source data
list hasnt been automatically
refreshed.

Information about a chart No databases are added to view. Add a database to the view.
isnt displayed in the Chart
Catalogue list.

The chart is a test or sample Test and sample datasets are not based
dataset. on paper charts and therefore no source
paper chart information is provided for
them.

The Chart Catalogue list is not Wait until the list is completed.
completely populated.

Chart view doesnt respond The chart is being redrawn. Wait some time until the chart is
to the left button mouse redrawn.
click.
ERBL mode is enabled. Disable the ERBL mode.

Mariner Object or Manual Update Disable the mode.

editing mode is enabled.

Chart scale and position are Logbook playback mode is Disable the logbook playback mode.
changing at random. enabled big R letter in the
upper left corner of the chart view
indicates the playback mode.

The Route Up button in the Voyage mode is not enabled. Route Up function works only in the
Navi Navigation Data Voyage mode.
tab is grayed and cant be
pressed.

238
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

The Course Up or the Route Navigation mode is turned off. Turn the Navigation mode on.
Up button is pressed but the
chart orientation is not Chart orientation coincides with
changed. the own ship course or the route
direction respectively.

The True or the Relative Navigation mode is turned off. Turn the Navigation mode on (the True
button is pressed, but the and Relative motion modes only work
own ship symbol leaves the when the Navigation mode is on).
chart view.

Drift values for dead Position sensor, Gyrocompass and Drift parameters are calculated
reckoning (DR) cant be Log data are available and valid. automatically.
changed.

Position value for DR cant Position sensor data are available Position value is taken from the sensor
be changed. and valid. data.

Heading and speed values Gyrocompass and Log data are Heading and speed values are taken
for DR cant be changed. available and valid. from the sensors data.

Route is in the Voyage mode The own ship heading differs Restart Voyage.
but most values in the Route from the active route leg by more
monitoring panel are than 90.
Unreachable. Check validity of the Heading sensor
data.

Own ship prediction vector The Prediction vector option is Enable the option: check the Prediction
is not displayed. not enabled. vector checkbox in the Navi Own
ship past track and vector tab.

Gyrocompass and Log sensors are Contact your system administrator.

not registered in the system
properly.

Ship symbol is always Chart view scale value is too Set larger scale value.
displayed in the simplified small.
form (two concentric
circles). The True scale ship image Enable the option: check the True scale
option is not enabled. ship image checkbox in the Config
Navigation Data tab.

After the Databases Databases synchronization Install licenses on the PC.

synchronization process, comprises only copying and
detailed charts are not registering DB data, licenses are
displayed on the PC to which not copied.
DB was copied.

239
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

Routes are not synchronized Route synchronization process Synchronize routes manually: in the
between the Route Planning between the Route Planning Route Route Planning tab, select the
Station and Master or Station and Master and Backup PC in the drop-down list next to the
Backup computers. computers is performed manually. Synchronize routes with button and
press the button.

Cannot load route for Some problems with the route. Try to edit this route if its not
voyage message appears at possible, the route is broken.
the Voyage start.

Its not possible to print data Printer is not set up in the system. Contact your system administrator for
from Route Planning, printer setup.
Logbook, Chart.

Communication error The importing operation was Stop transmitting the route from the
message is displayed during started after the route data had device, press the Import button in the
importing a route from been sent from the device. Route Export/Import From/To
device. Device tab, restart transmitting the route
from the device.

Radar image is not Radar is not plugged to the radar Plug the radar to the radar board.
displayed. board.

Plugged radar is powered off. Power the radar on.

Radar data reception is not started Start the radar data reception: press the
in the ECDIS. Start radar button in the Info Radar
Image tab.

Could not start radar Radar board is not plugged to the Plug the radar board to the ECDIS.
processor message is ECDIS.
displayed when starting the
radar data reception.

The Start radar button is Wrong setup of the radar board. Contact the support service of the
pressed but no radar image equipment provider.
displayed.
The display of the radar image is Turn on the display of the radar image.
off (Radar indicator is orange
and the Hide radar image option
in the Info Radar Image tab is
marked).

No chart data is displayed. Display chart data.

Wrong configuration of the Sea, Set the Sea and Rain sliders in the Info
Rain and Gain parameters. Radar Image tab to minimum, and
the Gain slider to 60-70.

240
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

Radar image and chart do Wrong setup of the radar board. Contact the support service of the
not match. equipment provider.

Own ship heading and radar Adjust the heading and the radar image
image are not adjusted. using the Orientation adjustment slider
in the Info Radar Image tab.

Position of the radar onboard the Set the position correctly in the Config
own ship is set incorrectly. Own Ship Position of
Instrument tab.

AIS targets are not AIS transponder device is not Contact your system administrator.
displayed. registered in the system or
registered incorrectly.

AIS display is off. Turn the display of AIS targets on: click
on the AIS indicator it becomes green.

No AIS targets are available. Check in the Info AIS Monitor tab.

AIS targets are too far from the Unmark the AIS visibility range option
own ship. in the Config AIS tab or set a smaller
value.

All AIS targets have the Lost Check in the Info AIS Monitor tab.
status.

No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed: in the

Input/Output program module. Data Licensing tab press the License
list button and select Software Modules
in the Databases drop-down list. The
ECDIS_IO (ECDIS) license should be
installed.
If not, apply the license and restart
ECDIS.

241
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

ARPA targets are not ARPA device is not registered in Contact your system administrator.
displayed. the system or registered
incorrectly.

Targets display is off. Turn the display of ARPA targets on:

click on the ARPA indicator it
becomes green or check the Visible
check box in the Info Targets
ARPA targets tab.

No ARPA targets are available. Check in the Info Targets tab.

No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed: in the

Input/Output program module. Data Licensing tab press the License
list button and select Software Modules
in the Databases drop-down list. The
ECDIS_IO (ECDIS) license should be
installed.
If not, apply the license and restart
ECDIS.

Operation failed: Cannot The log book page is currently Display a different page in the log book
open logbook file message displayed in the log book. and try to archive that page again.
is displayed when trying to
archive a log book page. The page you are trying to archive The currently displayed page and pages
is for the day before the currently for days before and after the current
displayed day. page date cannot be archived.

The page you are trying to archive The Active page and pages for days
is for the day before the Active before and after the Active page dates
day. cannot be archived.

Page with the Active label The Active page is being recorded The Active page and pages for days
cant be archived. and cant be archived. before and after the Active page dates
cannot be archived.

Brightness of the screen is The Dusk or Night palette is set. Change the palette to Day.
not sufficient.
The Monitor brightness control Contact your system administrator to
value is set to the minimum. change the brightness value.

Alarm exists but no sound is Buzzer for all alarms is disabled. Enable the buzzer: check the Buzzer
available. On/Off checkbox in the Config
Alarm Setup tab.

Buzzer for the particular alarm is Enable the buzzer: check the Buzzer
disabled. checkbox of the alarm in the Config
Alarm Setup Alarms tab.

242
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Trouble Probable Cause Solution

Tides and Streams C-Map Professional+ database is Register, license and add Professional+
information is not displayed. not registered, licensed or added DB to the view.
to the view.

Tides display is off. Turn the display of tides on: check the
Switch Tides On/Off checkbox in the
Info Tides Info (or Streams Info)
tab.

Failed to display weather Corrupted *.GRIB file was Request the same package once more.
package message appears. received from the server.

Weather package is received Weather display is off. Turn the display of weather data on:
correctly and loaded, but no press the Toggle Weather button in the
weather data is displayed. Weather Weather Presentation
(Easy Mode) tab.

No weather parameters are Select weather parameters to display in

selected to be displayed. the Weather Weather Presentation
tab.

Weather forecast time does not Change the time: move the time slider in
match with the time set in the Weather Weather Presentation tab.
weather time setup tool.

Anti-collision tool is absent. No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed: in the
Anti-collision program module. Data Licensing tab press the License
list button and select Software Modules
in the Databases drop-down list. The
ANTICOLL (Anticollision) license
should be installed.
If not, apply the license and restart
ECDIS.

243
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX C List of Input Sentences
The table below lists sentences which can be received and processed by the ECDIS and devices producing
the sentences.

Device Type Sentences Recommended sentences

Position device GLL; VTG; RMC; GGA, ZDA, DTM, GLL; VTG; ZDA, DTM
SGD, GNS

Gyro VHW, THS, HDT, HDM, HDG, ROT, THS, ROT

VDR

Speed Log VHW, VBW VBW

ARPA TTM, TLL TTM

AIS VDM, VDO, ABK VDM, VDO

Echo Sounder DBT, DPT DPT

Wind Sensor MWV MWV

Route Planner RTE, WPL RTE, WPL

ABK UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement

Standard: NMEA 0183 v.3, 2000 (not recommended for new designs)
The ABK-sentence is generated when a transaction, initiated by reception of an ABM, ACA, AIR, or BBM
sentence, is terminated. This sentence provides information about the success or failure of a requested ABM
broadcast of either ITU-R M.I 371 messages 6 or 12.
$--ABK, xxxxxxxxx1, x2, x.x3, x4, x5*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 xxxxxxxxx MMSI of the addressed AIS unit

2 x AIS channel of reception

3 x.x Message type

4 x Message sequence number

5 x Type of acknowledgement

244
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 ALR Set alarm state
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Local alarm condition and status. This sentence is used to report an alarm condition on a device and its
current state of acknowledgement.
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss1, xxx2, A3, A4, c--c5*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 hhmmss.ss Time of alarm condition change, UTC

2 xxx Local alarm number (identifier) [identification number of

alarm source]

3 A Alarm condition (A = threshold exceeded, V = not exceeded)

4 A Alarms acknowledge state, A = acknowledged,

V = unacknowledged

5 c--c Alarms description text

DBT Depth Below Transducer

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Water depth referenced to the transducer.
$--DBT, x.x1, f2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, F6*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Depth value in feet

2 f Measurement unit: f for feet

3 x.x Depth value in meters

4 M Measurement unit: M for meters

5 x.x Depth value in fathoms not processed

6 F Measurement unit: F for fathoms not processed

245
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 DPT Depth
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring transducer. Positive offset numbers
provide the distance from the transducer to the waterline. Negative offset numbers provide the distance from
the transducer to the part of the keel of interest. For the ECDIS the offset is always negative so as to provide
depth relative to the keel.
$--DPT, x.x1, x.x2, x.x3*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Water depth relative to the transducer, in meters

2 x.x Offset from transducer, in meters (distance from transducer to

keel)

3 x.x Maximum range scale in use not processed

DTM Datum Reference

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Local geodetic datum and datum offsets from a reference datum. This sentence is used to define the datum to
which a position location and geographic locations in subsequent sentences are referenced. Latitude,
longitude and altitude offsets from the reference datum, and the selection of the reference datum, are also
provided.
$--DTM,ccc1,a2,x.x3,a4,x.x5,a6, x.x7,ccc8*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 ccc Local datum

2 a Local datum subdivision code not processed

3 x.x Lat offset, min not processed

4 a N/S not processed

5 x.x Lon offset, min, not processed

6 a E/W not processed

7 x.x Altitude offset, m not processed

8 ccc Reference datum

246
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 GGA Global positioning system (GPS) fix data
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Time, position and fix-related data for a GPS receiver.
$--GGA, hhmmss.ss1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, x6, xx7, x.x8, x.x9, M10,
x.x11, M12, x.x13, xxxx14*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 hhmmss.ss UTC of position

2 llll.ll Latitude: degrees and minutes

3 a N/S

4 yyyyy.yy Longitude

5 a E/W

6 x GPS quality indicator

7 xx Number of satellites in use, 00-12, may be different from the not processed
number in view

8 x.x Horizontal dilution of precision not processed

9 x.x Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level (geoid) not processed

10 M Units of antenna altitude, meters not processed

11 x.x Geoidal separation: the difference between the WGS-84 earth not processed
ellipsoid surface and mean sea level (geoid) surface, =
mean sea level surface below the WGS-84 ellipsoid surface.

12 M Units of geoidal separation, meters not processed

13 x.x Age of differential GPS data: time in seconds since last SC104 not processed
type 1 or 9 update, null field when DGPS is not used.

14 xxxx Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023 not processed

247
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 GLL Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Latitude and longitude of vessel position, time of position fix and status.
$--GLL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, hhmmss.ss5, A6, a7 *hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 llll.ll Latitude

2 a N/S

3 yyyyy.yy Longitude

4 a E/W

5 hhmmss.ss UTC of position

6 A Status: A=data valid; V=data invalid

7 a Mode indicator

GNS GNSS Fix Data

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Fix data for single or combined satellite navigation systems (GNSS). This sentence provides fix data for
GPS, GLONASS, possible future satellite systems and systems combining these. This sentence could be used
with the talker identification of GP for GPS, GL for GLONASS, GN for GNSS combined systems, as well as
future identifiers. Some fields may be null fields for certain applications, as described below.
$-- GNS, hhmmss.ss1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, cc6, xx7, x.x8, x.x9,
x.x10, x.x11, x.x12 *hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 hhmmss.ss UTC of position

2 llll.ll Latitude: degrees and minutes

3 a N/S

4 yyyyy.yy Longitude

5 a E/W

6 cc Mode indicator

7 xx Total number of satellites in use, 00-99 not processed

8 x.x Horizontal dilution of precision not processed

248
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
No. Field Description Comments

9 x.x Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level (geoid), meters not processed

10 x.x Geoidal separation, meters not processed

11 x.x Age of differential data not processed

12 x.x Differential reference station ID not processed

HDG Heading, deviation and variation

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
IMO Resolution A.382 (X). Heading (magnetic sensor reading), which if corrected for deviation will
produce magnetic heading, which if offset by variation will provide true heading.
$--HDG, x.x1, x.x2, a3, x.x4, a5*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Magnetic sensor heading, degrees

2 x.x Magnetic deviation, degrees

3 a E/W

4 x.x Magnetic variation, degrees

5 a E/W

249
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 HDM Heading magnetic
Standard: NMEA 0183 v.3, 2000 (not recommended for new designs)
Actual vessel heading in degrees magnetic.
$--HDM, x.x1, M2*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Magnetic heading, degrees

2 M Heading type: M for magnetic

HDT Heading true

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading.
$--HDT, x.x1, T2*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x True heading, degrees

2 M Heading type: T for true

MWV Wind speed and angle

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
When the reference field is set to R (Relative), data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the
vessel's bow/centerline and the wind speed, both relative to the (moving) vessel. Also called apparent wind,
this is the wind speed as felt when standing on the (moving) ship.
When the reference field is set to T (Theoretical, calculated actual wind), data is provided giving the wind
angle in relation to the vessel's bow/centerline and the wind speed as if the vessel was stationary. On a
moving ship these data can be calculated by combining the measured relative wind with the vessels own
speed.
$--MWV, x.x1, a2, x.x3, a4, A5 *hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Wind angle, 0 to 359

2 a Reference, R = relative, T = true

3 x.x Wind speed

4 a Wind speed units: K = km/h; M = m/s; N = knots

5 A Status: A = data valid; V= data invalid

250
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GNSS navigation receiver.
$--RMC, hhmmss.ss1, A2, llll.ll3, a4, yyyyy.yy5, a6, x.x7, x.x8, xxxxxx9,
x.x10, a11, a12*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 hhmmss.ss UTC of position fix

2 A Status: A = data valid; V = navigation receiver warning

3 llll.ll Latitude

4 a N/S

5 yyyyy.yy Longitude

6 a E/W

7 x.x Speed over ground, knots

8 x.x Course over ground, degrees true

9 xxxxxx Date: dd/mm/yy

10 x.x Magnetic variation, degrees not processed

11 a E/W not processed

12 a Mode indicator

ROT Rate of turn

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
IMO Resolution A.526. Rate of turn and direction of turn.
$--ROT, x.x1, A2*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Rate of turn, /min, "-" = bow turns to port

2 A Status: A = data valid; V = data invalid

251
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 RTE Routes
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Waypoint identifiers, listed in order with starting waypoint first, for the identified route. Two modes of
transmission are provided: "c" indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted;
"w" indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been
reached (FROM), while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently
heading for (TO) and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route.
$--RTE, x.x1, x.x2, a3, c--c4, c--c5, ......6 c--c7*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Total number of messages being transmitted

2 x.x Message number

3 a Message mode

4 c--c Route identifier

5 c--c Waypoint identifier

6 Additional waypoint identifiers

7 c--c Waypoint "n" identifier

SGD Position accuracy estimate

Standard: NMEA 0183 v.3, 2000 (not recommended for new designs)
Estimate of position accuracy based on geometric dilution of precision (GDOP) and system noise, in feet and
nautical miles.
Limited utility, no recommended replacement.
$--SGD, x.x1, N2, x.x3, f4*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Accuracy in nautical miles

2 N N for nautical miles

3 x.x Accuracy in feet not processed

4 f f for feet not processed

252
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 THS True heading and status
Standard: NMEA 0183 v.3, 2000 (not recommended for new designs)
Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading. This
sentence includes a mode indicator field providing critical safety related information about the heading
data, and replaces the deprecated HDT sentence.
$--THS, x.x1, a2*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Heading, degrees true

2 a Mode indicator

7 c--c

TLL Target latitude and longitude

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Target number, name, position and time tag for use in systems tracking targets.
$--TLL, xx1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, c--c6, hhmmss.ss7, a8,
a9*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 xx Target number 00 99

2 llll.ll Target latitude

3 a N/S

4 yyyyy.yy Target longitude

5 a E/W

6 c--c Target name

7 hhmmss.ss UTC of data

8 a Target status: L = Lost, tracked target has been lost;

Q = Query, target in the process of acquisition; T = tracking

9 a Reference target = R, null otherwise

253
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 TTM Tracked target message
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
IMO Resolution A.820:1995 and MSC 64(67) Annex 4: Data associated with a tracked target relative to own
ship's position.
$--TTM, xx1, x.x2, x.x3, a4, x.x5, x.x6, a7, x.x8, x.x9, a10, c--c11, a12, a13,
hhmmss.ss14, a15 *hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 xx Target number, 00 to 99

2 x.x Target distance from own ship

3 x.x Bearing from own ship, degrees

4 a true/relative (T/R)

5 x.x Target speed

6 x.x Target course, degrees

7 a true/relative (T/R)

8 x.x Distance of closest-point-of-approach

9 x.x Time to CPA, min., "-" increasing

10 a Speed/distance units, K/N/S

11 c--c Target name

12 a Target status: L = Lost, tracked target has been lost;

Q = Query, target in the process of acquisition; T = Tracking

13 a Reference target = R, null otherwise

14 hhmmss.ss Time of data (UTC)

15 a Type of acquisition

TXT Text transmission

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
For the transmission of short text messages. Longer text messages may be transmitted by using multiple
sentences.
$--TXT, xx1, xx2, xx3, c--c4*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

254
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
No. Field Description Comments

1 xx Total number of messages (see note 1), 01 to 99

2 xx Message number (see note 1), 01 to 99

3 xx Text identifier (see note 2)

4 c--c Text message (see note 3)

NOTE 1 Text messages may consist of the transmission of multiple messages all containing identical field
formats. The first field specifies the total number of messages, minimum value = 1. The second field
identifies the order of this message (message number), minimum value = 1. For efficiency, it is
recommended that null fields be used in the additional sentences, otherwise data is unchanged from the first
sentence.
NOTE 2 The text identifier is a number, 01 to 99, used to identify different text messages.
NOTE 3 ASCII characters, and code delimiters if needed, up to the maximum permitted sentence length (i.e.
up to 61 characters including any code delimiters).
Example: A GPS receiver sends a text alarm message (message ID 25, DR MODE ANTENNA FAULT!)
upon reverting to dead-reckoning mode due to an antenna fault (note the use of ^ 21 to indicate !).
$GPTXT,01,01,25,DR MODE-ANTENNA FAULT^21*38<CR><LF>
VBW Dual ground/water speed
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Water-referenced and ground-referenced speed data.
$--VBW, x.x1, x.x2, A3, x.x4, x.x5, A6, x.x7, A8, x.x9, A10*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Longitudinal water speed ("-" = astern), knots

2 x.x Transverse water speed ("-" = port), knots not processed

3 A Status, water speed: A = data valid, V = data invalid

4 x.x Longitudinal ground speed ("-" = astern), knots

5 x.x Transverse ground speed ("-" = port), knots not processed

6 A Status, ground speed: A = data valid, V = data invalid not processed

7 x.x Stern transverse water speed ("-" = port), knots not processed

8 A Status, stern water speed: A = data valid, V = data invalid not processed

255
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
No. Field Description Comments

9 x.x Stern transverse ground speed ("-" = port), knots not processed

10 A Status, transverse ground speed: A = data valid, V = data not processed

invalid

VDM AIS VHF data-link message

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of a received AIS message packet, as defined in ITU-R
M.1371 and as received on the VHF Data Link (VDL), using the six-bit field type. The structure provides
for the transfer of long binary messages by using multiple sentences.
Data messages should be transmitted in as few sentences as possible. When a data message can be
accommodated in a single sentence, then it shall not be split.
!--VDM, x1, x2, x3, a4, ss5, x6*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to

9

2 x Sentence number, 1 to 9

3 x Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9

4 a AIS channel

5 ss Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message

6 x Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5

VDO AIS VHF data-link own-vessel report

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of an AIS units broadcast message packet, as defined in
ITU-R M.1371 and as sent out by the AIS unit over the VHF data link (VDL) using the six-bit field type.
The sentence uses the same structure as the VDM sentence formatter.
!--VDO, x1, x2, x3, a4, ss5, x6*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to

9

2 x Sentence number, 1 to 9

3 x Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9

4 a AIS channel

256
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
No. Field Description Comments

5 ss Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message

6 x Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5

VDR Set and drift

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
The direction towards which a current flows (set) and speed (drift) of a current.
$--VDR, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Direction, degrees true

2 T T for true

3 x.x Direction, degrees magnetic not processed

4 M M for magnetic not processed

5 x.x Current speed in knots

6 N N for knots

257
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 VHW Water speed and heading
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
The compass heading to which the vessel points and the speed of the vessel relative to the water.
$--VHW, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6, x.x7, K8*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Heading, degrees true not processed for

speed log

2 T T for true not processed for

speed log

3 x.x Heading, degrees magnetic not processed for

speed log

4 M M for magnetic not processed for

speed log

5 x.x Current speed in knots not processed for

gyroscope

6 N N for knots not processed for

gyroscope

7 x.x Current speed in km/h not processed

8 K K for km/h not processed

258
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 VTG Course over ground and ground speed
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
The actual course and speed relative to the ground.
$--VTG, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6, x.x7, K8, a9*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Course over ground, degrees true

2 T T for true

3 x.x Course over ground, degrees magnetic

4 M M for magnetic

5 x.x Speed over ground, knots

6 N N for knots

7 x.x Speed over ground, km/h

8 K K for km/h

9 a Mode indicator

WPL Waypoint location

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint.
$--WPL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, c--c5*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 llll.ll Waypoint latitude, N/S

2 a N/S

3 yyyyy.yy Waypoint longitude, E/W

4 a E/W

5 c--c Waypoint identifier

259
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 ZDA Time and date
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
UTC, day, month, year and local time zone.
$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss1, xx2, xx3, xxxx4, xx5, xx6*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 hhmmss.ss UTC time

2 xx Day, 01 to 31 (UTC)

3 xx Month, 01 to 12 (UTC)

4 xxxx Year (UTC)

5 xx Local zone hours, 00 h to 13 h not processed

6 xx Local zone minutes, 00 to +59 not processed

260
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX D List of Output Sentences
The table below lists sentences which can be transmitted by the ECDIS and devices for which the sentences
are intended.

Device Type Sentences

Route Planner RTE, WPL

261
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 RTE Routes
Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Waypoint identifiers, listed in order with starting waypoint first, for the identified route. Two modes of
transmission are provided: "c" indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted;
"w" indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been
reached (FROM), while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently
heading for (TO) and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route.
$--RTE, x.x1, x.x2, a3, c--c4, c--c5, ......6 c--c7*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 x.x Total number of messages being transmitted

2 x.x Message number

3 a Message mode

4 c--c Route identifier

5 c--c Waypoint identifier

6 Additional waypoint identifiers

7 c--c Waypoint "n" identifier

WPL Waypoint location

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint.
$--WPL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, c--c5*hh<CR><LF>

No. Field Description Comments

1 llll.ll Waypoint latitude, N/S

2 a N/S

3 yyyyy.yy Waypoint longitude, E/W

4 a E/W

5 c--c Waypoint identifier

262
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX E Algorithm and Examples of Manual Position Fix by Range
and Bearing LOPs
Algorithm
All measurements are assumed as corrected by systematic device errors (device description table allow
modification of this corrections).
All measurements are assumed as containing not correlated random errors (Gaussian distribution with 0
mean value and RMS retrieved from device description table).
All Lines of Position are assumed as Geodetic lines on the reference-ellipsoid (now fixed to WGS 84).
Calculations on the ellipsoid use internal algorithm from dKart library.
A position FLa = (, ) is needed for the algorithm. Initial position is usually received from dead reckoning.
Start position covariance matrix Ba is 2x2 diagonal with values for latitude and longitude covariance equal to
10000 m RMS value. This makes no affect of a priory given position to the resulting estimated position.
The iteration calculates as well known minimum RMS
dFL=1/(1/Ba + H'(1/B)H) H'(1/B) dZ (1)
FL=FLa+Cp dFL (2)
where
dFL = [dLat dLon] position tranfser vector;
B is NxN (N - number of LOPs) diagonal matrix with diagonal element Bii = RMSd * RMSd for
distance measurements and Bjj = RMSbrg * RMSbrg * Drp *Drp; RMSd is a RMS of distance
measurements assumed as increasing on more distances in not a linear function; RMSbrg is a bearing
measurement error (radians) Drp - calculated from given position distance to reference point;
H is a gradient matrix 2xN dimension with elements calculated as differentials of the LOP parameter by
corresponded coordinate Lat or Lon;
dZ is a difference vector N - size with element (LOP calculated - LOP measured)
Cp is a 2x2 matrix of the Latitude and Longitude effective radius calculated in the FL position.
Measurements aging
When the positioning system (for example Navstar GPS) is used continuously and manual observation is for
check the position by another than GPS data the aging is not applied to LOP measurements taken in different
time. In the Dead Reckoning mode we assume that Speed Over Ground error SOGerr affects to the aged
measurements in SOGerr * DeltaT / D * sin ( BRG - COG ) for bearing measurements covariance and
SOGerr * DeltaT * cos ( BRG - COG ) for distance measurements.

263
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Common examples of manual LOP fixes based on 3 bearing lines
1. Three reference points with bearing differences of 120 equally distant from the dead reckoning position
of the own ship

Figure 227 Three reference points, bearing difference is 120, equally distant from DR position
a. If the time of measurements is the same, lines of position are equally accurate; the observed position
is in the center of the error figure, and the figure is a circle

Figure 228 Observed position in the center of the error figure

264
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 b. If the time of measurement is different, lines of position are not equally accurate anymore due to
measurement aging. For example, if one LOP was measured earlier than the other two, the observed
position moves to the intersection of the later measured LOPs.

Figure 229 Observed position near the intersection of LOPs measured later
2. Three reference points with bearing difference of 120, two reference points are equally distant from the
dead reckoning position of the own ship, distance to the 3rd reference point is twice as long as to the first
two, time of measurement is the same

Figure 230 Three reference points, bearing difference is 120, one reference point is at a double distance
from DR position than the other two

265
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 The observed position moves to the intersection of the more accurate LOPs; the accuracy ellipse major
axis is perpendicular to the less accurate LOP.

Figure 231 Observed position near the intersection of the more accurate LOPs

266
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
3. Two of the three reference points equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship have a
small difference between bearings

Figure 232 Three reference points, equally distant from DR position, small angle between bearing lines of
two points

267
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 The observed position is situated near the intersection of LOPs with the angle between them closer to
90; the accuracy ellipse major axis is aligned with LOPs intersecting at a smaller angle.

Figure 233 Observed position near the intersection of LOPs with the angle closer to 90

268
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX F Theoretical Principles of the Anti-collision Display
Consider a collision scenario between own ship and an external target. The vessels encounter geometry is
plotted in Figure 234. The OOW can easily verify that the vessels have a potential point of collision (PPC)
from visual observation (i.e. aspect angle to target is unchanged) or from radar observation (i.e. relative
motion of target echo towards the centre of own ship).

Figure 234 Example of encounter geometry for own ship and a target on collision course
It is easy to see graphically that the PPC can be moved along the predicted track line of target if own ship
changes course to starboard and simultaneously increase speed, Figure 235.

Figure 235 Movement of PPC due to change of own ship course and speed

269
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
The vessels encounter geometry in different collision scenarios shows that a line displaced parallel to the in-
sight line between the vessels and drawn from the tip of targets true vector can be regarded as a collision
danger line (CDL) in true motion, Figure 236.

Figure 236 Collision danger line in true motion display

The CDL has a very simple interpretation: if the tip of own ships vector touches the CDL, then a direct
collision threat exists and the vessels will collide if the speed and course are maintained. Likewise, any
manoeuvre (change of course and/or speed) that deflects the end of own ships velocity vector away from the
CDL is a potential evasive manoeuvre, Figure 237 - Figure 239.

Figure 237 Evasive action by change of own ships course to starboard in order to pass astern of target

270
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
 Figure 238 Evasive action by decrease of own ships speed in order to pass astern of target

Figure 239 Evasive action by a combination of change of own ships course and decrease of speed in order to
pass astern of target

271
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
The CDL can be displayed to any acquired target in a true motion overview because it is completely
independent of own ships speed and course. It is only depending on the targets relative position, speed and
course. This means that collision risk can be judged simultaneously to all acquired targets in a true motion
overview with easy identification of possible evasive manoeuvres, Figure 240 and Figure 241.

Figure 240 From judging the tip of own ships vector in relation to the CDLs it follows that there is a direct
collision threat to targets 2 and 5. Target 1 will pass slightly astern and targets 3 and 4 will pass ahead of
own ship if the motion parameters (speed and course) are maintained

Figure 241 A change of course to starboard is a potential evasive action by own ship. Targets 1, 2 and 3 will
pass well ahead, while targets 4 and 5 will pass astern of own ship if their course and speed are maintained

272
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
The CDL represents the situation where CPA = 0.0 n. miles. The general solution is an actual collision
danger sector (CDS) which can be found by introducing a safety margin (CPA limit) with respect to
minimum passing distance. Figure 242 shows the collision scenario (Figure 234) with simultaneous display
of CDL and relative vector (as it can be imagined from radar display).

Figure 242 Collision risk interpretation in: 1) true motion: Tip of own ships vector touches the collision
danger line to target. 2) relative motion: The relative vector has direction towards centre of own ship
Figure 243 shows that the safety margin can be introduced by a circle that is located at the centre of own ship
with radius equal the user-selected CPA limit. In the relative motion display of an ARPA radar the safety
margin is usually set by utilizing the variable range marker (VRM).

Figure 243 Introduction of safety margin representing a minimum passing distance at closest point of
approach

273
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
The solution to pass a distance equal to the selected safety margin (CPA limit) astern of target is shown by a
course change to starboard, which deflects the relative vector so its extension becomes a tangent to the CPA
limit circle, Figure 244. (This solution can be found by utilizing the ARPA Trial Manoeuvre functionality.)

Figure 244 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit: Change of own ships course in order to pass astern of
target with selected CPA limit (i.e. extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle)
The solution to pass a distance equal selected safety margin (CPA limit) ahead of target is shown by a course
change to port, Figure 245.

Figure 245 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit: Change of own ships course in order to pass ahead of
target with selected CPA limit (i.e. extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle)

274
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Figure 244 and Figure 245 show that a sector-shaped region can be imagined in the relative motion display,
Figure 246.

Figure 246 Sector shaped collision danger region as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an
ARPA radar with safe passing distance set by the VRM radius from centre of own ship
This imagined region in the relative display can be regarded as a cone-shaped collision danger region in
which the user-selected safety margin is violated if the relative vector terminates inside the sector. It can be
transformed to appear in the true motion display as shown in Figure 247 and is hereinafter referred to as the
Collision Danger Sector (CDS).

Figure 247 Collision danger sector (CDS) (red) in true motion display as it appears from transformation of
collision danger sector as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an ARPA radar

275
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
The CDS has identical properties as the CDL and can thus be displayed to any acquired target in a true
motion overview. Figure 248 and Figure 249 show how the OOW easily can identify the exact amount of
evasive action required to pass with a minimum safety distance equal selected CPA limit. Traffic scenario
identical to Figure 240 and Figure 241.

Figure 248 Display of CDL/CDS to the acquired targets from Figure 240 and Figure 241. Safe areas are
easily identified in true motion overview

Figure 249 A change of course to starboard to pass ahead of target 4 and astern of target 1 with a safety
distance margin equal selected CPA limit

276
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX G: Preparing for Chart Update

When you receive updates from your chart supplier these are delivered by CD-Rom or DVD media format.

Here we describe how to move files to a USB pen from a media.

1.: Prepare a USB Pen

Insert a USB Memory pen into your computer
Then the computer will show the following information:

Press the x (Left hand upper corner) and close the window

Press start at the desktop, normally located at lower left hand corner.

Now press Computer and a new window will be shown:

277
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Locate USB Pen, here shown by name Removable Disk and with the drive letter F:. Pen name may be
different and drive letter may change depending of your computer configuration.

Right click on this drive, and a menu will be shown:

Click Format and this will be shown:

278
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Kindly pay attention size of the USB Pen, its required to us a pen with a memory size not less than 4GB.
Here a 15 GB Pen is used.
Correct File system settings to FAT32, and Allocation unit size to Default allocation size, mark Quick
Format and press Start. Now formatting of pen will be done shortly, and the pen is ready. If any error
happens during the format process, kindly exchange the pen with a new one, and start the process from
beginning.

Press OK.

279
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
After short time this confirmation window will be shown:

Press OK and your pen is ready.

2 Copy of files from media to USB memory pen.

Insert the chart media to the computers drive:

Shortly after this window will be shown:

Press Open folder to view files, and below windows will be shown.

280
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Right click the folder CM93_x, and below menu will be shown:

281
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Press Send to and select CHARTUPDATE. Now files will be moved from Chart media to to the USB
Memory Stick.

When copy process is done above window will close.

Now the pen holds a complete copy of chart data.

3. Removing of USB Memory Pen from computer.

282
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Find in the lower right hand corner the icon for removing external devices:

Press this icon with left mouse control button.

In this case the USB Pen is the Flash Voyager, press Eject Flash Voyager, and the system will confirm that
USB Pen can be safely removed from PC.

Now the USB Pen can be removed and used at the iECDIS system for update or installing a new Chart
database.

283
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX H: Display Reading Distance

Its recommended that the nominal reading distance does not exceed more than one (1) meter.

284
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX I: RMRS Rules for Equipment Utilization

Following actions to be taken into consideration by the owner according to the paragraph 219 of the
Technical Regulations on the Safety of Sea Transport Items:
The safety of decommissioned or subject to utilization sea transport infrastructure item shall be ensured by
the owner of such item or operating organization. During this period it is necessary to perform regular
monitoring of safety condition of the decommissioned sea transport infrastructure item which has been:

1. Standard Martek Marine Warranty conditions consists of: warranty on the equipment is valid for a period
not exceeding 24 months from shipping.

2. If equipment (within or without a vessel utilization) has to be utilized:

- It should be done according to Martek Marine recommendations, mentioned under item 3 below;
- The company utilizing ships (ship equipment) shall develop an appropriate utilization documentation for
each ship (ship equipment) where technological process modes, scope and sequence of utilization stages are
specified (ref. to paragraph 160 of the Technical Regulations on the Safety of Sea Transport Items).

3. Martek Marine recommendations for utilization of iECDIS components according to Interim

provisions for the application of the Technical Regulations on the Safety on Sea Transport items in the
RS activity:
- Survey of materials and products prior to recycling has to be carried out in conformity with requirements
set in paragraphs 158 and 160 of Technical Regulations. Report by the established form 6.3.79RF has to
be issued and documentation on recycling has to be approved by the bodies authorized for approval of
documentation on recycling in conformity with the legislation specified in subparagraph a of the paragraph
160 of the Technical Regulations;

Martek Marine recommendations for utilization:

- All iECDIS components should be switched off and disconnected from the their power sources
- All iECDIS components should be disconnected from all other sources. It is recommended to protect
wires and keep them for any future upgrade or reinstallation
- All iECDIS components should be packed into standard cartoons for transportation to the utilization
company.
- Utilization Company is to utilize iECDIS components according to Russian Federation rules for
utilization of such components and paragraph 219 of the Technical Regulations on the Safety of Sea
Transport Items.
- iECDIS PCBs and internal components can be easily dismounted from the military ruggedized casing
and utilized separately, as electronic equipment.

285
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX J: Energy Saving
Technical Regulations on the Safety of Sea Transport Items, approved by the RF Government Order
No.
620 of 12 August 2010, declared following in the Paragraph 6:

Designers, builders and manufacturers of sea transport and infrastructure items shall ensure the
energy efficiency of such items.

iECDIS Power Consumptions

iECDIS systems are powered from vessel main power supply. The iECDIS systems were developed and
constructed using Low Power Consuming Parts for all components internal and external. The system is
fitted with an Intel Atom Processor that consumes <10W and the whole system runs at <70W.

286
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX K: Declaration

Martek Marine hereby declares that this product conforms to:

Declaration code 648700 Technical Regulation

287
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX L: Russian Mark of Conformity

Technical Regulations on the Safety of Sea Transport Items, approved by the RF Government Order No.
620 of 12 August 2010, declared following:

Technical regulation items whose conformity with the Technical Regulations is confirmed shall have a
conformity mark, as prescribed by the Russian Federation legislation on technical regulation

Following components of iECDIS are labelled according to the Russian Federation Government Order On
Conformity Mark No. 696 of 19 November 2003 and Section 20 of the Technical Regulations on the Safety of
Sea Transport Items mentioned above:

1. iECDIS, labels to be placed on rear side of the unit:

a). Unit Label with the name of the component, Part number and Serial number:
b). Russian Mark of Conformity:
c). Software version label:
d). MED Wheel Mark

Note: The Conformity Mark image is to be monochrome and to contrast with the colour of the surface on which it is
applied (See RF Government Order On Conformity Mark No. 696 of 19 November 2003)

Russian Symbol of Conformity

288
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
APPENDIX M: Language Selection

Enabling Multi-Language During Installation

English is the default language that the iECDIS system software uses but the Russian language is available as an
option. The Russian language must be enabled during system setup. On the NIC setup window there is a check box for
Multi-language which must be checked to enable the Russian language software. Once the system is set up you can
change the language of the software. Follow the below procedure for installation and language selection of the Russian
language.

NIC Setup Window

- Check the Multi language selection box

- Select the Russian from the drop down box

289
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Language Selection

- Press the Windows Key

- Select the Russian Flag on the right hand side of the menu
- The software will now reload and be in Russian

- To change back to English, press the Windows key and select the English flag

290
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Glossary
Activated AIS target Bearing (BRG)
A target activated for the display of additional The angle between the direction of the boat and
graphically presented information (for example, the reference direction expressed in degrees, with
heading line, velocity vector, etc.) a notation of True or Magnetic Variation (T or
M). Due north corresponds to 0 degrees, east to
Aids to Navigation
90, south to 180 and west to 270. For compass
Usually pertains to buoys, ranges and the like. bearings, the reference direction is magnetic
AIS North. For true bearings the reference direction is
true North.
See Automatic Identification System.
Bearing from Ship to Cursor
ARPA
This data is an aid in route making and planning.
See Automatic Radar Plotting Aid. Bering from ship to cursor is expressed in
Automatic Identification System (AIS) degrees, with a notation of True or Magnetic
Variation.
AIS provides a means of broadcasting digitally
navigation information including ship Bookmark
position/speed/heading/dimension/name/destinatio A saved combination of chart selection, zoom
n/ROT, aids to navigation, base station reports level and position on the chart. Created with the
and more. Created by the IMO and sanctioned by Set Bookmark command, it may be returned to at
the U.S. Coast Guard for ship monitoring and any time with the Go to Bookmark command.
collision avoidance. It is used by ship traffic
monitoring and control locations throughout the Bow
world to improve situational awareness and help The front of a ship
prevent collisions at sea.
Broadcast Notice to Mariner (BNM)
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA)
See Local Notice to Mariners (LNM).
The functionality entailing the detection of
Cartesian Coordinates
moving targets and calculating their speed and
course. Used to automatically detect radar targets Also known as "Rectangular Coordinates". A two-
and output to other devices, ARPA is a collision dimensional plane contains an x-axis and a y-axis.
avoidance system. Negative x coordinates lay to the left of the y-axis
and positive x-coordinates to the right. Negative y
Azimuth
coordinates lay below the x-axis and positive
Azimuth of a body is the arc of the horizon above the x-axis.
intercepted between the North or South point and
Chart
the foot of the vertical circle passing through the
body. It is reckoned in degrees from either the Nautical term for maps used in nautical navigation
North or South point clockwise entirely around that show the depth of waters as well as land
the Horizon. (source: Our Restless Tides). boundaries and other obstructions. Charts may be
paper or electronic and electronic charts may be of
Bathymetric
raster or vector type.
Measurement of the depth, contours and slopes of
Chart License
the floor of a body of water (sea, lake, ocean or
river), obtained through topographic charting. Chart Licenses unlock a Chart region. Each
license is made up of 16 digits laid out in the
Beam
following convention: 1234-1234-1234-1234
Ship width.

291
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Closest Point of Approach (CPA) Dead-reckoned Position
Predicted closest point a maneuvering boat will DR position extrapolated from the last accepted
get relative to any target, moving or otherwise, position update, based on present course and
located at a point on the relative movement line speed.
perpendicular to the reference ship. The minimum
Dead Reckoning
horizontal distance between two crafts during a
close proximity encounter. A method of navigation where known values
(position, course, speed, time and distance to
COG
travel) are used to calculate unknown values.
See Course Over Ground. Values such as set and drift can also be
incorporated.
COM Port
Deviation
The interface through which the ECDIS can
communicate with peripherals. Visual series Changes in the magnetic field due to the ferrous
support 32 COM Ports. composition of surrounding objects affecting the
measured direction of magnetic North. Deviation
Course
is measured as the angular difference in direction
The direction a boat is being steered. between the actual magnetic heading and the
Course Over Ground (COG) compass heading.

Is the track of the ship over the ground and is DGPS (Differential GPS)
based on position changes. A network of 60 radio beacons in conjunction
CPA with a GPS that sends correction information used
to reduce positional error to the 1-3 meter range.
See Closest Point of Approach
Digital Selective Calling (DSC)
Cross Track Error (XTE)
A type of VHF radio that allows boats to contact
The distance of a perpendicular line drawn from other, similarly equipped boats using that boats
the ship to an active route leg. Determines how MMSI Number. DSC allows two radios to
much the ship is straying from the course of a communicate selectively with each other while
Route. excluding other receivers from using the signal.
Current DSC can report position information.

The flow of water characterized by direction and Display Base

speed. Current speed and direction may change Level of information which cannot be removed
with the tide. from the ECDIS display, consisting of
See also Ebb Current and Flood Current. information which is required at all times in all
geographic areas and all circumstances. It is not
Dangerous Target intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.
Tracked radar or reported AIS target with a Display Scale
predicted CPA and TCPA that violates values
preset by the user. The respective target is marked Ratio between a distance on the display and a
by a dangerous target symbol distance on the ground, normalized and expressed
as, for example 1:10 000.
Data Sentence
Dongle
The unit of information sent between peripherals
and the ECDIS, conforming to the NMEA 0183 Small hardware device that unlocks the ECDIS.
specification.

292
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Dongle Number Electronic Navigation Chart (ENC)
Similar to the Serial Number, a Dongle Number is An electronic data file containing information that
attached to the Dongle, made up of 20 digits in the could be used to display a chart. The ENC
following convention: 1234-123456-1234-123456 contains all the chart information necessary for
safe navigation and may contain supplementary
DR
information in addition to that contained in the
See Dead Reckoning. paper chart (for example sailing directions) which
Draft may be considered necessary for safe navigation.

The extent to which a boat protrudes into water. EP

The draft of a boat may vary due to changes in See Estimated Position.
weight and changes in water salinity.
Estimated Position
Drift
Position of own ship determined by the common
The cumulative effect of wind and current on the intersection of two LOPs.
ship.
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
DSC
The calculated arrival time to an active waypoint,
See Digital Selective Calling. assuming no change in present course and speed
Ebb Current (Ebb) or weather conditions. This time is based on
computer clock time. For greatest accuracy, make
Movement of tidal current away from shore or sure computer clock is synchronized with real
down a tidal river or estuary. time.
Echo Sounder Fish Finder
See Sounder. See Sounder.
Electronic Chart Display and Information Fix
System (ECDIS)
Position of own ship determined, without
A hardware/software/data marine navigation reference to any former position, by the common
system that meets the specifications of the intersection of three or more LOPs.
International Hydrographic Organization (IHO).
An ECDIS is the only electronic system allowed Flood Current (Flood)
to replace paper charts under the International The movement of tidal current up the shore or up
Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea a tidal river or estuary.
(SOLAS).
Geo-reference
Electronic Chart System (ECS)
To establish the relationship between page
A system comprised of: coordinates on a planar map and real-world
navigation software coordinates.

navigation data Global Positioning System (GPS)

system hardware A worldwide radio-navigation system developed

by the US Department of Defense. In addition to
An ECS is any combination of hardware and military purposes it is widely used in marine,
software that displays marine charts terrestrial navigation and location based services.
electronically. The term ECS is used specifically Uses stationary satellites or a surface signal to
when ECDIS specifications are not met by the locate the ship with a very high degree of
software/hardware system. accuracy. The term GPS is frequently used to
refer to GPS receivers.

293
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
GPS Latitude
See Global Positioning System. The designation for angles measuring how far
North or how far South a position is. Value range
Great Circle
is from 90S to 0 at the equator to 90N. Latitude
A Great Circle is the shortest distance between values are represented by the Greek letter lambda
two points on a spheroid. A great circle is formed ().
at the edge of a plane crossing through the center
Lat/Lon
of a sphere. Unlike Rhumb Lines, great circles
generally do not have constant bearing (the Any objects position, expressed in Latitude and
equator and the meridians are prominent Longitude.
exceptions).
Leg
Greenwich Meridian
The segment of a route between two waypoints.
See Prime Meridian.
Line of Position
GRIB (Gridded Binary)
Plotted line on which own ship is located
A general purpose, bit-oriented data exchange determined by observation or measurement of the
format, GRIB is an efficient vehicle for range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other
transmitting large volumes of gridded data over charted element.
high-speed telecommunication lines using modern
Log
protocols. GRIB weather communicates large
weather data files efficiently. A record of the ships movements and a place for
manual text entries.
Heading
Longitude
The direction the ship is oriented.
The designation for angles measuring how far
High Water (HW)
West or how far East a position is. Value range is
The maximum height reached by a rising tide. from 180E to 180W. Values of longitude are
represented with the Greek letter phi ().
Higher High Water (HHW)
LOP
The highest of the high water (or single high
water) of any specified tidal day due to the See Line of Position.
declinational effects of the Mood and the Sun.
LORAN (LOng Range Aid to Navigation)
Higher Low Water (HLW)
LORAN is a terrestrial-based navigation system
The highest of the low water of any specified tidal using the time interval between radio signals to
day do to the declinational effects of the Moon determine the position of the receiver. LORAN
and the Sun. was popular with marine navigation prior to the
existence of GPS. The current version of LORAN
International Hydrographic Organization
in use is LORAN-C. LORAN fails under different
(IHO)
conditions than GPS, arguably making it a
An organization that provides the specifications complementary radio-navigation system.
for what qualifies as an ECDIS.
Lost Target
Knot (Kt)
Tracked radar or reported AIS target for which the
A speed unit of one international nautical mile system is no longer receiving valid position data.
(18520.0 meters or 6,076.11549 international feet) The target is represented by a lost target
per hour. symbol.
Low Water
The minimum height reached by a falling tide.

294
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Lower High Water (LHW) Mercator Projection
The lowest of the high waters of any specified The Mercator projection is a conformal projection
tidal day due to the declinational effects of the devised by Gerhardus Mercator in 1569. Similar
Moon and the Sun. to a cylindrical projection in that the horizontal
and vertical distances are stretched towards the
Lower Low Water (LLW)
poles. Unlike the cylindrical projection the
The lowest of the low waters (or single low water) vertical and horizontal stretching of the chart
of any specified tidal day due to the declinational preserves shape and direction. Due to increasing
effects of the Moon and Sun. distortion towards the poles Mercator charts are
Magnetic Variation not very useful for representing cartographic
information towards the poles.
The degree to which the magnetic north differs
from the true north. This data is available from the Lines of latitude and longitude are straight lines
Current Chart indicator. on the Mercator projection.

Man Overboard (MOB) On Mercator charts, rhumb lines can be drawn as

straight lines because the Mercator projection
Mark that can be placed on a digital chart to preserves bearing.
indicate emergency location. The ECDIS will
track that location to aid in returning the boat to MMSI
MOB coordinates. See Maritime Mobile Service Identity.
Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) MOB
MMSI Numbers are a series of nine digits See Man Overboard.
transmitted over a DSC radio path in order to
National Marine Electronics Association
uniquely identify ship stations, ship earth stations,
(NMEA)
coast stations, coast earth stations and group calls.
These identities can be used by telephone and This organization has determined a standard,
telex subscribers connected to the general 0183, to which all data transmission to and from
telecommunications network principally to call marine peripherals must conform. The NMEA
ships automatically. issues standards for interfacing marine electronics
devices. Pronounced "nee-ma". Not to be
Mean High Water (MHW)
confused with NEMA (National Electrical
A tidal datum. The average of the higher high Manufacturers Association).
water heights observed over the National Tidal
Computers directly connected to NMEA
Datum Epoch.
producing devices (GPS, heading sensor, etc).
Mean Higher High Water (MHHW) receive raw NMEA data. This data conforms to
A tidal datum. The average of all the high water the NMEA 0183 (3.01) specification.
heights of each tidal day observed over the See also NMEA 0183 and NMEA 2000.
National Tidal Datum Epoch.
NMEA
Mean Low Water (MLW)
See National Marine Electronics Association.
A tidal datum. The average of all the low water
NMEA 0183
heights observed over the National Tidal Datum
Epoch. NMEA 0183 defines the electrical interface and
data protocol for communications between marine
Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW)
instrumentation. Many times referred to as
A tidal datum. The average of the lower low water "NMEA" in the context of marine instrumentation
height of each tidal day observed over the communications.
National Tidal Datum Epoch.

295
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
NMEA 2000 Prime Meridian
This standard contains the requirements for a The meridian of longitude which passes through
serial data communications network to inter- the original site of the Royal Observatory in
connect marine electronic equipment on ships. It Greenwich and used as the origin of Longitude.
is multi-master and self configuring and there is Also known as the Greenwich Meridian.
no central network controller. Equipment
RADAR (RAdio Distancing And Ranging)
designed to this standard will have the ability to
share data, including commands and status with Microwave pulses used to detect objects (usually
other compatible equipment over a single channel. metallic) based on wave reflection.
(source: http://www.nmea.org/pub/2000/) Radio Technical Commission for Maritime
NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Services (RTCM)
Administration) In the United States, the Federal Communications
NOAA is a federal agency focused on the Commission (FCC) and U.S. Coast Guard use
conditions of the oceans and the atmosphere. RTCM standards to specify radar systems,
NOAA supplies navigation chart information for Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons
the coastal U.S. and the Great Lakes region. and the basic version of Digital Selective Calling
(DSC) radios.
Overscale
Range
Display of the chart information at a display scale
larger than the compilation scale. Overscaling The distance between two specified points,
may arise from deliberate overscaling by the usually the ship and a mark.
mariner, or from automatic overscaling by ECDIS Range from Ship to Cursor
in compiling a display when the data included is
at various scales. The distance between the ship icon and the cursor.
Pan Raster Chart
To move the view window over the chart. (Also Charts where the chart information is stored as a
called Scrolling). rasterized image. Examples are raster charts are
Raster Plus (RPL), BSB and GeoTIFF. Rasters are
Past Track the scanned images of the original paper chart.
An onscreen and/or logged record of a ships Rate Of Turn (ROT)
previous movements.
The speed at which heading is changing.
Polyconic Projection
Rhumb Line
The polyconic projection involves projecting the
surface of the Earth onto a series of cones situated A Rhumb Line is a line of constant bearing.
with their apexes over the poles. Unlike great circles, rhumb lines are usually not
the shortest path between two points on a sphere.
Port Part of the utility of rhumb lines is that they can
Port designates the left side of a boat as seen be drawn as straight lines on Mercator projections.
standing on the deck facing toward the bow. Port Rhumb lines have the advantage of being easy to
side is indicated with a red light. navigate because they follow a constant bearing.
The parallels of the earth are examples of rhumb
Prediction Vector
lines. Rhumb lines are undefined values at the
A vector displayed in front of the vessel showing poles.
where the boat will be after a specified period of
A rhumb line of sufficient length will usually tend
time, assuming no intervening heading or speed
to spiral around the earth towards a pole forming a
changes.
loxodrome. Such spiraling rhumb lines will form a
logarithmic spiral on a polar stereographic
projection.
296
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
ROT Sounder (also known as Fish Finder or Echo
Sounder)
See Rate Of Turn.
A Sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect the
Route
distance to the sea floor, calculating the time
Desired path of travel, created on a chart or grid interval between signal transmission and the
and consisting of starting, ending and any number detected reflected signal.
of interim waypoints. The ECDIS can instruct a
Source Scale
properly connected autopilot to steer along the
path of a Route. The original scale of a paper chart from which an
electronic chart is derived.
Scale
Standard Display
See Zoom.
Level of information that should be shown when a
Scroll
chart is first displayed on ECDIS. The level of the
To move different parts of a long list into view, information it provides for route planning or route
using the arrow buttons or scroll bar. Also, scroll monitoring may be modified by the user
is often used as a synonym for pan. according to the user's needs.
Selected Target STW
Target selected manually or automatically for the See Speed Through Water.
display of detailed alphanumeric data, information
Speed Over Ground (SOG)
and text in a separate user dialogue area. The
target is represented by a selected target SOG is the actual, fixed, geographic speed of a
symbol. ship over the earths surface. It is essentially the
Speed Through Water (STW), plus the cumulative
SENC
effect of wind and current.
See System Electronic Navigational Chart.
Speed Through Water (STW)
Set
STW is the relative speed of the vessel over water
The cumulative effect of wind and current on the surface. See also Speed Over Ground (SOG).
direction of a ship.
Starboard
Slack Water (Slack)
Starboard designates the right side of the boat as
The state of a tidal current when its speed is hear seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow.
zero, especially the moment when a current Starboard side is indicated with a green light.
changes direction and its speed is zero.
Stern
Sleeping AIS Target
The rear of a ship.
AIS target indicating the presence of a vessel
System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC)
equipped with AIS in a certain location. The
target is represented by a sleeping target symbol A database in the manufacturers internal ECDIS
indicating the vessels orientation. No additional format, resulting from the lossless transformation
information is presented until the AIS target is of the entire ENC contents and updates. It is this
activated. database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for
the display generation and other navigational
SOG
functions, and is the equivalent of an up-to-date
See Speed Over Ground. paper chart. The SENC may also contain
information added by the mariner and information
from other sources.

297
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Target The UTM segments the earth into 60 six degrees
of longitude wide zones where the cylinder is
In nautical terminology, a target is generally an
oriented along the central meridian of a zone. The
obstacle or object in or near the water to avoid for
zones extend from 84N to 80S. The sixty zones
the purpose of safe navigation.
start 180 degrees east and proceed eastward. The
TCPA usage of zones allows the UTM projection to be
See Time to Closest Point of Approach. used over the entirety of the Earth while
minimizing distortion towards the poles.
Tidal Currents
User-added Electronic Chart Information
Tidal currents (a horizontal motion) are a result of
the rise and fall of the water level due to tides (a Electronic chart information manually entered by
vertical motion). The effects of tidal currents on the user for presentation (for example,
the movement of water in and out of bays and navigational notes, safety zones of interest, local
harbors can be substantial. notices to mariners, etc.)

See Neap Tides. Variable Range Marker (VRM)

Tide Term describing a circle around the boat. When

enabled, the VRM can be manually manipulated
The change in ocean levels due to gravitational to change the radius.
influences external to the Earth. Formulas for
calculating tides can be found in tide and current Variation
tables provided by NOAA and the British Also known as Magnetic Variation and
Admiralty. Declination. The angular difference in direction
Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA) between true North and magnetic North.

This is the time remaining until the closest point Vector Chart
of approach of a target. A chart where chart information is stored in terms
Time To Go (TTG) of points, lines and polygons. NCX and TX-97
charts are vector chart formats.
The amount of time estimated until the ship
reaches an active waypoint, assuming no Velocity Made Good (VMG)
intervening change in course or speed. Displayed The speed at which the boat is moving towards its
in hours and minutes. intended destination, regardless of the ships
TTG direction.

See Time To Go. Vertical Datum

Universal Transverse Mercator Projection For marine applications, a base elevation used as a
(UTM) reference from which to reckon heights or depths.
It is called a tidal datum when defined in terms of
UTM is similar to the Mercator projection except a certain phase of the tide. Tidal datums are local
the projecting cylinder is mapped transverse to the datums and should not be extended into areas
meridians and the Mercator projection used is a which have differing hydrographic characteristics
secant variation where the map scale to nominal without substantiating measurements. In order that
scale is 0.9996. they may be recovered when needed, such datums
are referenced to fixed points known as bench
marks. (source: Our Restless Tides).
VMG
See Velocity Made Good.
VRM
See Variable Range Marker.
298
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Waypoint Zoom
A mark of which routes are made. The ship, when To change the apparent scale of a chart in the
following a route, steers by successive waypoints. chart view.
XTE
See Cross Track Error.

299
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
Abbreviations
ACK ECDIS
Acknowledgement Electronic Chart Display and Information System
AIS ECMWF
Automatic identification system European Centre for Medium-Range Weather
Forecasts
ARPA
ENC
Automatic radar plotting aid
Electronic Navigation Chart
BRG
EP
Bearing
Estimated position
BTW
ERBL
Bearing to Waypoint
Electronic range and bearing line
BWW
ETA
Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint
Estimated Time of Arrival
COG
ETD
Course Over the Ground
Estimated Time of Departure
CP
GC
Control Point
Great Circle
CPA
GMDSS
Closest point of approach
Global maritime distress and safety system
CS
GLONASS
Conning Station
Global Navigation Satellite System
DGPS
GPS
Differential Global Positioning System
Global Positioning System
D, DIST
GRIB
Distance
GRIdded Binary
DPT
HDG
Depth
Heading
DR
HO
Dead reckoning
Hydrographic office
DTG
IHO
Distance to Go
International Hydrographic Organization
DWP
IMO
Distance to Next Waypoint
International Maritime Organization
E
East
300
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.
LAT S
Latitude South
LOC SAR
Local Mean Time Search and Rescue
LON SENC
Longitude System Electronic Navigational Chart
LOP SOG
Line of Position Speed Over the Ground
MMSI SOLAS
Maritime Mobile Service Identities Safety of life at sea
MOB SPD
Man Overboard Speed
N STW
North Speed through Water
N/A TCPA
Not Available Time to Closest Point of Approach
NAVTEX TM
Navigational Telex True motion
NMEA TTA
National Marine Electronics Association Time to Arrival
NOAA TTG
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Time to Go
Administration
UTC
RAD
Universal Time, Coordinated.
Radius
VRM
RL
Variable range marker
Rhumb Line
W
RM
West
Relative motion
WOL
RMS
Wheel Over Line.
Root Mean Square
WOP
ROT
Wheel Over Point
Rate of turn
WP, WPT
Waypoint

301
iECDISUserManual
VersionNumber1.6
August2014

Copyright2014MartekMarineLimited.Allrightsreserved.